Nokia 6681 User Manual
9237084_LA_1.fh10 27.1.2005 21:21 Page 1
2 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, NOKIA CORPORATION declare under our sole respo nsibility that the product RM-57 is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Directive: 1999/5/ EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www .nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/ Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfe r, distribu tion or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without t he prior written permission of Nokia is pro hibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, and Pop-Po rt are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Othe r product and company names menti oned herein may be trademark s or tradenames of their re spective owners. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Software Ltd (c) 1998- 200(5). Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are tra demarks or registered trademar ks of Sun Microsystems , Inc. Bluetooth is a registered trade m ark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Stac î, LZS î, é1996, Stac, Inc., é1994-1996 Microsoft Corporation. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Hi/fn î, LZS î,é1988-98, Hi/fn. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Ot her patents pending. Part of the software in this product is é Copyright ANT Ltd. 1998. All rights reserved. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 tex t input software Copyright (C) 1997-2005. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. USE OF THIS PR ODUCT IN ANY M ANNER THAT COMP LIES WITH THE M PEG-4 VISUAL STANDA RD IS PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE DIRECTLY RELA TED TO (A) DATA OR INFORMAT ION (i) GENERATED BY AND OBTAINED WIT HOUT CHARGE FROM A CONSUMER NOT THEREBY ENGAGED IN A BUSINESS ENTERPR ISE, AND (ii) FOR PERSONAL USE ONLY; AND (B) OTHER USES SPECIFICALLY AND SEPARATELY LICENSED BY M PEG LA, L.L.C. Nokia operates a policy of conti nuous development. Nokia reserves the ri ght to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible fo r any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequent ial or indirect dama ges howsoever caused. The contents of this docume nt are provided âÂÂas i sâÂÂ. Except as required b y applicable law, no warranties of a ny kind, either express or imp lied, including, but not limite d to, the implied warrantie s of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are made in re lation to th e accur acy, reliability or conten ts o f this document. Nokia reserves the r ight to revise this document or withdr aw it at any time without prior notice The availability of particular products ma y vary by region. Please check with the Nokia dealer neare st to you. Export Controls This device may contain commodities, tec hnology or software subject to expo rt laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion cont rary to law is prohibited. FCC INDUSTRY CANA DA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interf erence (for example, w hen using a telephone in close proximity to receiving eq uipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your te lephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contac t your lo cal service f acility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the conditio n that this device does not cause har mful interference.
3 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. ABOUT ADD-ON APPLICATIO NS FOR YOUR NOKIA 6681 In the sales package you will find a Reduce d-Size Dual Voltage MultimediaMemoryCard (RS-MMC) that contains additional applicat ions from Nokia and third-party developers. The content of the RS-MMC and the availability of applications and services may vary by countr y, retailer and/or netw ork operator. The applications and further information a bout the use of the applications at www.nokia.co m/support are available in sele cted languages only. Some operations and features ar e SIM ca rd and/or network dependen t, MMS dependent, or dependent on the compatibility of devices and the content format s supported. The availability of services may vary by country and region. Some services are subject to a separ ate charge. NO WARRA NTY The third party applica tions provided on the Reduce d-size MultimediaMem oryCard (RS-MMC) have been created and are owne d by persons or entities that are not affiliated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrights and/or intellectual property rights to these th ird party applications. As such, Nokia does not take responsibility for any end user suppor t or the functionality of these thir d party applications, nor the inform ation presented in the applications or these materials. Nokia does not provide any warra nty for these applications. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THE SOFTWARE AND/OR APPLICATIONS (COLLECT IVELY, THE "SOFTWARE") AR E PROVIDED "AS IS" WIT HOUT WARRANTY O F ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTE NT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. NEITHER NOKIA NO R ITS AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, E XPRESS OR IMPLIED, INC LUDING BUT NOT LI MITED TO WARRANTIES O F TITLE, MERCHA NTABILITY OR FI TNESS FOR A PART ICULAR PURPOSE OR THA T THE SOFTWARE WILL NO T INFRINGE ANY THIR D PARTY PATENTS, COPYRI GHTS, TRADEMA RKS OR OTHER RIGHTS. THERE IS NO WARRANTY BY NOKIA OR BY ITS AFFILIATES THAT ANY ASPECT OF THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMEN TS OR THAT THE OPE RATION OF THE SOFT WARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTE D OR ERROR-F REE. YOU ASSUME ALL RESPONSIBILITY A ND RISK FOR THE SEL ECTION OF THE SOFT WARE TO ACHIEVE YOUR INTENDED RESU LTS AND FOR THE INSTALLA TION, USE AND RE SULTS OBTAINED FROM IT. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICAB LE LA W, IN NO EVENT SHALL NOKIA, ITS EMPLOYEES OR A FFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY LO ST PROFITS, REVENU E, SALES, DATA, INFORM ATION OR CO STS OF PROCUR EMENT OF SUBST ITUTE GOODS OR SERVICE S, PROP ERTY DA MAGE, PERSONA L INJURY , INTERR UPTION OF BUS INESS, OR FOR ANY DIRE CT, INDIRECT, I NCIDENTAL, ECO NOMIC, COV ER, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGE S, HOWEVER CAUSED AND W HETHER ARISING UNDE R CONTRACT, TO RT, NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHER THEO RY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF THE INSTALLATION OR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF NOKIA OR ITS AFFILI ATES ARE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DA MAGES. BECAU SE SOME COUNTR IES/STATES/JUR ISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE AB OVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATI ON OF LIABILITY, BUT MAY A LLOW LIABILITY TO B E LIMITED, IN SUCH CASES, NO KIA, ITS EMPLOYE ES' OR AF FILIATES' LIABILITY SHALL BE LIM ITED TO 50 EURO. NOTHING C ONTAINED IN THIS DISCLAIMER SHALL PREJUDICE THE STAT UTOR Y RIGHTS OF ANY PA RTY DEALING AS A CONSUMER. COPYRIGHT (c) 2005 NOKIA. ALL RIGH TS RESERVED. NOKIA AND NOKIA CONNECTING PEOPLE ARE REGISTERED TRAD EMARKS OF NOKIA CORPO RATION. NOKIA CORPOR ATION NOKIA MULTIMEDIA MARKETING P.O. BOX 100, FIN-00045 NOKIA GROUP, FINLAND TEL. 358 7180 08000 TELEFAX 358 7180 34016 WWW.NOKIA.COM ISSUE 1 EN, 9236904
Contents Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Contents For your safety ............................. .............. 9 Personalise your phone .......................... 12 Set tones ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ... 12 Offline profile ........... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 13 Transfer content from an other phone .................. ......... 13 Change the look of your phone .. ..................... ......... ....... 14 Active standby mode ..... ............ .................................. ....... 15 Your phone ........................... ................... 16 Put on the wrist st rap ........ ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 16 Clock............. ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... 16 Clock s ettings........... .......... ......... ...... ......... .......... .........16 World clock............... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 17 Volume a nd loudspeaker con trol ........... ......... ......... ....... 17 File manager ............... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... ..... 17 View memory consumption ...... ........... ......... ......... ... 18 Memory lowâÂÂfree memory .............. ......... ......... ....... 18 Memory ca rd tool ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ..... 19 Format a memory card ............... ......... ......... ......... ..... 19 Make calls ............................ ................... 21 Call ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ...... .......... ...... ... 21 Speed dial a phone number ................. ......... ............ 21 Make a c onference call............ ......... ...... .......... ......... 21 Answer or reje ct a call ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ...... ... 22 Call wa iting (network servic e) .............. .......... ......... 22 Options during a call .................. ......... ......... ......... ..... 23 Log ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... 23 Recent calls ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ..... 23 Call duration ........ ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ....... 23 Packet data ..... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 24 Monitor all communication event s ............ ............ 24 Contacts (Phonebook) ......... .................... 26 Save names a nd numbers ............... ......... ......... ......... ....... 26 Default numbers an d addresses ........... .......... ......... 26 Copy contacts....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 27 SIM directory and othe r SIM services ............ ....... 27 Add ringing tones for conta cts ................ ......... ........... ... 27 Voice dialling ........ ........... .................................. ............ ....... 28 Add a voice ta g .............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ... 28 Make a c all with a voice ta g ............... ............ ......... 28 Create contact groups ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ... 29 Remove members from a group ................ ........... ... 29
Contents Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery ......................... ........ 30 Camera .... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .. 30 Take pictures............... ......... ......... ......... .......... ...... ....... 30 Take pictures in a sequence .............. .......... ......... .... 32 You in the picture âÂÂself-timer .......... .......... ......... .... 32 The flash....... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... 32 Adjust colour and lighting ...... .................. ......... ....... 32 Adjust c amera settings ..... ......... ......... .......... ......... .... 33 Record videos ................ ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .. 33 Adjust v ideo recorder settings ............... ......... ......... 34 Gallery .............. ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... .... 35 View images ................ ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... 35 Imaging ...................... ............................... 37 Video editor ............... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 37 Edit video, soun d, and transitions ............... ......... .. 37 Image manager .............. ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... .. 38 Image print ................ ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... 38 Printer selection..... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... 39 Print preview .............. ......... ......... ......... .......... ...... ....... 39 Print settings .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .. 39 RealPlayer⢠....... ........... ....................... ........................... ....... 39 Play video or sound c lips .............. ......... ......... ......... .. 40 Stream content ov er the air .......... ........... ......... ....... 40 Receive RealPlayer sett ings ...................... ......... ....... 40 Messaging........... ............................... ....... 42 Write text ............. ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... 43 Traditional text input .............. ......... ......... ......... ........ 43 Predictive text inputâÂÂDictiona ry .................. .......... 44 Copy text to clipboard ............ ........... .................. ...... 45 Write and send me ssages ................ ......... ......... ....... ........ 46 Receive M MS and e-mail s ettings .......... ......... ...... 47 InboxâÂÂreceive mes sages ........... ......... ......... .......... ......... ... 48 Multimedia messa ges......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ... 48 Data and set tings ....... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ... 48 Web service mes sages...... ....... ......... ......... ......... ........ 49 My folders ........... ............ ...................... ............ ........... ........ 49 Mailbox ........ ............ ........... ........... ....................... ........... ...... 49 Open the mailbox .......... ...................... .................. ...... 50 Retrieve e-mail me ssages ............. ......... ......... ....... ... 50 Delete e-mail messages.......... ......... ......... ......... ........ 51 Disconnect from the mailbox ...... ...................... ...... 51 OutboxâÂÂmessage s waiting to be sent ........... ......... ...... 52 View messa ges on a SIM ca rd ................. ......... ......... ...... 52 Messaging sett ings .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... . 52 Text message s..... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... 52 Multimedia messa ges......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ... 53 E-mail ............ ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ........ 54 Web service mes sages...... ....... ......... ......... ......... ........ 56 Cell broadcast.............. ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ...... 56
Contents Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Other settings ............. ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 56 Calendar ......... ............................... ........... 58 Create calenda r entries ........... ...... ......... ......... .......... ......... 58 Calendar vie ws ........ .......... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......... 59 Set a calendar alar m ........ ......... ...... ......... .......... ......... 59 Remove calendar entries ............... ......... .......... ......... 59 Calendar set tings ................ ......... ......... ......... ......... ..... 59 Web ........ ............................... ................... 60 Access the Web ........... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ..... 60 Receive browse r settings ........... ......... ......... ......... ..... 60 Enter the s ettings manually ......... ......... ............ ....... 60 Bookmarks v iew ........ ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... 61 Add bookmarks manually .. ............... .................. ....... 61 Send bookmarks ........... ........... .............................. ....... 61 Make a connect ion ........ .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ... 61 Connection security ...... ......... ......... ......... .......... ...... ... 62 Browse ............. ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ... 62 View saved pa ges ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 63 Download and purchas e items ........ ......... ........... ......... ... 63 End a connection ...... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ..... 64 Empty the cache ..... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 64 Web settings ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ..... 64 Office ..................... .............................. .... 66 Calculator .......... ...... ......... .......... ......... ...... ......... .......... ......... 66 Calculate percenta ges ................ ....... ......... ......... ....... 66 Converter ........ ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ..... 66 Set base currenc y and exchange ra tes ............. ..... 67 To-do............ ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 67 Create a task list .......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 67 Notes.......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ... 67 Recorder ............. ...... ......... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ... 68 My own ................. ............................... .....69 Go toâÂÂadd shortcuts ........ ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ..... 69 Delete a sh ortcut ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 69 Wallet ....... ...... ......... ......... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ... 69 Create a walle t code ........ ...... ......... ......... .......... ......... 70 Store personal card de tails ................ ......... ......... ..... 70 Create person al notes .............. ...... ......... .......... ......... 70 Create a walle t profile ............. ......... ......... ....... ......... 71 View ticket details ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ... 71 Wallet settings ........... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... 71 Reset the wa llet and wallet code ............... ............ 72 IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) .... ............. 73 Receive IM s ettings ............ ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 73 Connect to an IM server...... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... 73 Modify your IM settings ............. ........... ..................... ....... 73 Search for IM groups and us ers .......... ............ ......... ....... 74
Contents Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Join and leave a n IM group ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... .. 74 Chat ......... ....... ......... ...... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... 74 Record chats ........... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .. 75 View and sta rt conversations ............. ......... ......... ......... .. 75 IM cont acts ............ ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......... .... 76 Manage IM groups .............. ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... .... 77 Administrate an IM grou p ....................... ......... ......... ....... 77 Create a ne w IM group ............ ......... ......... ......... ....... 77 Add and remove group members ............ ......... ....... 78 Chat se rver settings...... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .... 78 Connectivity ....... .............................. ........ 79 Bluetooth connection ............. ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 79 Bluetooth connect ion settings .............. ......... ......... 79 Send data using a Blue tooth connection ............. 80 Pair devices ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... 81 Receive data using a Blue tooth conne ction ........ 81 Switch off Bluetooth conne ctivity .................. ....... 82 PC connections .............. ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... 82 CD-ROM .......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......... .... 82 Your phone as a modem............ ............ .................... 82 Connection man ager ........... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .... 82 View data connection det ails ......... ......... ............ .... 83 Remote synchronisa tion ........ ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 83 Create a new s ynchronisation profile ........ ......... .. 84 Synchronise data .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .. 84 Device manager .............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ... 85 Server profile settings .... ........... ......... ......... ......... ...... 85 Tools .................................... ...................... 86 Settings ...... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ........ 86 Phone settings ........... ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... . 86 Call settings ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... . 87 Connection settings ........ ......... ......... ......... ......... ........ 88 Date and time................. ...... ......... ......... .......... ......... ... 91 Security .............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... . 91 Call divertin g ........ .......... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......... ... 94 Call barring (net work service)............... ........... ........ 94 Network......... ......... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ...... 95 Enhancemen t settings ..... ......... ......... ......... ......... ...... 95 Voice commands ....... ............ ............................... ......... ...... 95 Add a voice command to an application .... .......... 95 Application manager ....... ........... .................................. ...... 96 Install applications and software ............... ............ 96 Remove applications and softwa re ......... ......... ...... 97 Application set tings ............ ....... ......... ......... ......... ...... 98 Activation keysâÂÂhandle copyright-protected files ... 98 Troubleshooting ......... .............................. 99 Q&A............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ... 99 Battery information ......................... .... 102
Contents Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Charging and dischargin g ........ ........... ......... ......... ......... 102 Care and maintenance ......................... 103 Additional safety information ............. 104 Index ............................ ......................... 107
9 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete us er guide for further in format ion. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or dan ger. ROAD SAFETY CO MES FIRST Obey all l ocal laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should b e road safety. INTERF ERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the phone o ff near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Fol low any restrictions. Wireless phones can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLI NG Don't use the phone at a refuelling point. Don't use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NE AR BLASTI NG Follow any restrictions. Don't use the phone where blasting is in progress. USE SENSI BLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Don't touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repa ir this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIE S Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompat ible products. WATER-RES ISTANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back- up copies or keep a written record of all important information.
10 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. CONNECTING TO OT HER PHONES When connecting to any other phone, read its user guide for detaile d safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGEN CY CALLS Ensure the phone function of the phone is switched on and in service. Press as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the start screen. Enter the emergency number, then press . Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 900/180 0/1900 network. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights o f others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the phone must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. Network servic es To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of th e features in this device depend on features in the wi reless network to function. These network services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilis e network services. Your service provid er may need to give you additional instructions for th eir use and explain what charges will apply. Some netw orks may have l imitations that affect how you can use Network Services. For instance, some networks ma y not support all language- dependent character s and services. Your service provider may ha ve reque sted that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Cont act your service provider for more information. This wireless device is a 3GPP GSM Release 99 terminal supporting GPRS service, and is designed to support also Release 97 GPRS networks. However, there may be some compatibility issues when used in some Release 97 GPRS networks. For more information, contact your service provider. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some fe atures of this device, such as MMS, browsing, e-mail an d cont ent downloading using
11 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. the browser or over MMS, require network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Check the model number of any charger before use with this phone. This phone is in tended for use when supplie d with power from ACP-12 and LCH- 12. Warning : Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The us e of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you di sconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Your phone and its en hancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of reach of small children.
Personalise your phone 12 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your phone Note: Your service provider or network operator may have requested a different order for menu items or the inclusion of differen t ic ons in the phone menu. Contact your servic e provider, network operator, or Nokia Customer Care f or assistan ce with any fea tures that differ from those described in this guide. ⢠To change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the screen saver , see âÂÂChange the look of your phoneâÂÂ, p. 14. ⢠To use the standby displa y for fast access to your most frequently used applicat ions, see âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 15. ⢠To customise the ringing tones, see âÂÂSet tonesâÂÂ, p. 12. ⢠To change the sh ortcuts assigned for the different presses of the scroll key an d selection keys in the standby mode, see âÂÂStandby modeâÂÂ, p. 86. ⢠To change the clock sho wn in the standby mode, select Clock > Options > Settings > Clock type > Analogue or Digital . ⢠To change the clock alar m tone, select Clock > Options > Sett ings > Clock Alarm tone and a tone. ⢠To change the calendar alarm tone, select Calend ar > Options > Settings . ⢠To change the welcome note to an image or text, select Tools > Settings > Phone > General > Welcome note or logo . ⢠To assign an individual ringing tone to a contact, select Contacts . See âÂÂAdd ringing tones for contactsâÂÂ, p. 27. ⢠To assign a speed dial to a contact, press a numbered key in the standby mode ( is reserved for the voice mailbox), and press . Press Yes , then select a contact. ⢠To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , New folder or Move to folder . You can move less used applications into folders , and place applications that you use more often into the main menu. Set tones To set and customise the ri nging tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environments, or caller groups, press , and select Tools > Pr ofiles . You can see the currently selected profile at the top of the display in the standby mode. If the Ge neral profile is in use, only the current date is shown.
Personalise your phone 13 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To change the profile, press in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate, and select OK . Tip! You can choos e Tone downloads to open a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start connection to a Web page to download tones. To modify a profile, select Tools > Pro file s . Scroll to the prof ile, an d sele ct Optio ns > Personalise . Scroll to the setting you want to cha nge , and press to open the choices. Tones stored on the memory card are indicated with . Scroll through the tone list and listen to each one before yo u make your selectio n. Press a ny key t o stop the sound. To create a new profile, select Options > Create n ew . Offline profile The Off line profile lets you use the phone without connecting to the wireless netw ork. When y ou activate the Offline profil e, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator. All wireless phone signals to and from the device are prevented. If you try to send messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. Tip! For information on how to change the alert tone for the calendar or clock, see âÂÂPersonalise your phoneâÂÂ, p. 12. Warning: I n Offline p rofile yo u cannot ma ke calls , except calls to certain emergency numbers, or use features that require networ k coverage. To mak e calls, change the profile to activ a te the phone function. If the device has been locked, you must enter the unlock code before you can change the profile and make calls. Warning: Your device must be switched on to use Offline profile. Do not switch the d evice on when wireless device use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. To leave the Offline profile, select another profile, and select Options > Activate > Yes . The phone re-enables wireless transmissions (providing there is suffici ent signal strength). If a Bluetooth co nnection is activated b efore entering the Offline profile, it will be deactivated. A Bluetooth connection is auto matic ally re activate d after leavin g the Offline profile. See âÂÂBluetooth connection settingsâÂÂ, p. 79 . Transfer content from another phone You can copy contacts, calend ar, images , video, and sound clips using a Bluetooth connection, fr om a compatible Nokia Series 60 phone.
Personalise your phone 14 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. You can use your Nokia 6681 device without a SI M card. The offline profile is automa tically activated when the phone is switched on without a SIM card. This allows you to use the SIM card in another phone. Before starting the transf er to your Nokia 6681 de vice, you must activate Bluetooth connectivity on both phones. On each phone press , and select Connect. > Bluetoo th . Select Bluetooth > On . Give a name to each phone. To transfer content: 1 Press , and select Tools > Transfer on your N okia 6681 device. Follow the in structions on the screen. 2 The phone searches for devices with Bluetooth connectivity. When it has finished the search, select your other phone from the list. 3 You are asked to enter a code on your Nokia 6681 device. Enter a code of your choice (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other phone, and select OK . 4 The Transfer application is sent to the other phone as a messag e. 5 Open the message to install Transfer on the other phone, and follow the instru ctions on the screen. The application is added to the main menu. 6 From your Nokia 6681 device, select the content you want to copy from the other phone. Content is copied from the memory a nd memory card of the other phone to your Nokia 6681 device a nd memory card. The copying time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Data is not removed from the other phone. Change the look of your phone To change the look of your phone display, such as the wallpaper, colour palette, an d icons, press , and select Tools > Themes . Th e active theme is indicated by . In Themes you can group together elements from other themes or select images from the Gallery to personalise themes further. The themes on the memory card are indicated by . Options in the Themes main view are Preview / Theme downlo ads , Apply , Edit , Help , and Exit . To activate a theme, sc roll to it, and select Options > Apply . To preview a theme, scroll to it, and select Options > Preview . To edit themes, scroll to a theme, and select Opt ions > Edit to change the following options : ⢠Wallpaper âÂÂThe imag e to be shown as a bac kground image in the standby mode.
Personalise your phone 15 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. ⢠Colour p alette âÂÂThe colours used on the screen . ⢠Screen saver âÂÂThe screen saver type: date and time, or a text you have written your self. See also Screen saver timeout settings, p. 87. ⢠Image in 'Go to' âÂÂThe background image for the Go to application. To restore the selected theme back to its original settings, select Options > Restore orig. theme when you edit a theme. Active standby mod e Use your standby display for fast access to your most frequently used applications. Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you are not able to change the m. To set the active standby mode on, press , select Tools > Setting s > Phone > Standby mode > Active standby , and press to switch active standby on or off. The active standby display is shown with default applications across the top of the screen, and calendar, to-do, and player events listed below. Scroll to an application or event, and press . The standard scroll key shortcuts available in the standby mode cannot be used when the active standby mode is on. To change the default appli cation shortcuts: 1 Press , select Tools > Settings > Ph one > Standby mode > Active standby apps. , and press . 2 Highlight a shortcut to an application, and select Options > Ch ange . 3 Select a new application from the list, and press .
Your phone 16 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your phone Put on the wrist strap Thread the strap, and tighten i t. Note: Use only No kia approved enhancements. Clock Options in Clock are Set alarm , Reset alarm , Remove alarm , Sett ings , He lp , and Exit . Press , and selec t Clock . To set a n ew alarm , select Op tions > Set alarm . Enter the alarm tim e, and select OK . When the alar m is active, the indicator is shown. To turn of f the alarm, select St op . When the alarm tone sounds, select Snooze to stop the alarm for five minutes, after which it will resume. Yo u can do this a maximum of five times. If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone . If you select St op , the device asks whether you want to activat e the device for calls. S elect No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. To cancel an alarm, select Clock > Op tions > Remove alarm . Clock settings To change the clock settings, select Op tions > Se ttings in the clock. To change the clock shown in the standby mode, scroll down, and select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone ne twork to update the time, date, and time zone information to y our phone (network service), scroll down, and select Auto t ime update . For the Auto time up date setting to take effect, the phone restarts. To change the alarm tone, scroll down, and select Clock alarm tone .
Your phone 17 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To change the daylight -savin g time status, scroll down, and select Daylight-saving . Select On to add one hour to the My home city time. See âÂÂWorld clockâ on p. 17. When the daylight-saving is active, the indicator is shown in the clock main view. World clock Open Clo ck , and press to open the world clock view. In the world clock view, you can view the time in different cities. To add cities to the list , select Options > Add city . Enter the first letter s of the city nam e. The search field appears automatically, and the matching cities are displayed. Select a city. You can a dd a maximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your current city, scroll to a city, and select Option s > My home city . The city is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in your phone is changed according to the city selected. Check that the time is correct and matches your time zone. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the volume level when you have an active ca ll or are listening to a sound, pr ess or , respectively. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and lis ten to the phone from a short distan ce without having to hold the phone to your ear, f or example, ha ving it on a table nearby. Sound applica tions use the loudspea ker by default . ⢠To locate the loudspeaker, see the Quick Start Guide, âÂÂKeys and partsâÂÂ. ⢠To use the loudspeaker during a call, start a call, and pres s . Important: Do not hold the phone near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. ⢠To turn off the loudspeaker when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, press . File manager Many features of the phone use memory to store data. These features include contac ts, messages, images, ringing tones, calendar and to-do notes, documents, and downloaded applicat ions. The free memory available depend s on how muc h data i s already saved in the phone memory. You can use a memory card as ex tra stora ge
Your phone 18 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. space. Memory cards ar e rewritable, so you can delete and save data on a memory card. To browse files and folders in the phone memory or on a memory card (if inse rted), pres s , a nd select Tools > File mgr. . The phone memory view ( ) opens. Press to open the memory card view ( ). To move or copy files to a folder, press and at the same time to mark a file, and select Options > Move to folder or Copy to folder . Icons in File mgr. : Folder Folder that ha s a subfolder To find a fil e, select Options > Find and the memor y from which to search, and enter a search text that matches the file na me. Tip! You ca n use Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite to view the different memories in your phone. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. View memory consumption To view what types of data you have in the phone and how much memory the different data types consume, select Options > Memory details . Scroll d own to Free memory to view the amount of free memory in the phone. To view the amount of free memory on the memory card, if you have a card inserted in the phone, press to open the memory card view, and select Options > Memory details . Memory lowâÂÂfree memory The phone notifies you if th e phone memory or memory card memory is getting low. To free phone memor y, transfer da ta to a memory card in the file manager. Mark files to be moved, select Options > Move to folder > Memory card , and a folder. To remove data to free memory, use File mgr. , or go to the respectiv e applicati on. For example, you can re move the following: ⢠Messages from Inbox , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messaging ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages from the phone memory ⢠Saved Web pages ⢠Saved images, videos, or sound files ⢠Contact info rmation â¢C a l e n d a r n o t e s
Your phone 19 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. ⢠Downloaded applications. See also âÂÂApplication managerâÂÂ, p. 96. ⢠Any other data that you no longer need Memory card tool Note: This device uses a Reduced Size Dual Voltage (1.8/3V) Mult iMediaCard (M MC). To ensure interoperability, use only dual voltage MMCs. Check the compatibility o f an MMC wi th its manufacturer or provider. Press , and select Tools > Memory . You can use a memory card as extra storage space. See the Quick Start Guide, âÂÂInserting the memory cardâÂÂ. You can also back up information from phone memory, and restore the information to the phone later. You cannot use the memory card if the door of the memory card slot is open. Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Do not open the memory card slot door in the middle of an operation. Opening the slot door may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the card may be corrupted. Options in the memory card tool are Backup phone mem. , Restore from card , Format mem. card , Memory card name , Memory d etails , Help , and Exit . Use only compatible MultiMediaCards (MM C) with this device. Other memory cards, such as Secure Digital (SD) cards, do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compatible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card may dam age the memor y card as well as the device, and data stored on th e incompatible card may be corrupted . ⢠To back up information from phone memory to a memory card, select Op tions > Backup phone mem. ⢠To restore information from the memory card to the phone memory, select Options > Restore from card . Format a memory card When a memory card is forma tte d, all data on the card is permane ntly los t. Tip! To rename a memory card, select Opt ions > Memory card name . Some memory cards are su pplie d preformatted and others require formatting. Consult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card before you can use it.
Your phone 20 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. To format a memory card, select Options > For mat mem. card . Select Yes to confirm. When format ting is complete, enter a name for the memory card, and select OK .
Make calls 21 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Make calls Call Tip! T o i n c r e a s e o r d e c r e a s e t h e v o l u m e d u r i n g a c a l l , press or . 1 In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. Press to remove a number. For international calls, p ress twice for the character (replaces the inte rnational access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Press to call the number. 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Tip! To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, press , and select Tools > Voice mailbox > Options > Change number . Enter the number (obtained from your service provider), and select OK . Pressing always ends a call , even if another appl ication is active. To make a call from Contacts , press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name; or enter the first letters of the name to the sear ch field. Matching contacts are listed. Press to call. To call your voice mailbox (network service), press and hold in the standby mod e. See also âÂÂCall divertingâÂÂ, p. 94. To call a recently dialled number in the standby mode, press to a ccess a list of the 20 last number s you called or attempted to call. Scroll to the number you want, and press to call the number. Speed dial a phone number To assign a phone number to one of the speed dialli ng keys ( â ), press , a nd select Tools > Speed dial . is reserved f or the voice mailbox. To call in the standby mode, press the speed dial key and . Tip! To speed dial a number by pressing and holding the key, press , and select Tools > Settings > Call > Speed dialling > On . Make a conference call 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Options > New call . The first call is automatically put on hold.
Make calls 22 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conf erence call, select Options > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Options > Conference > Add to conference . The phone supports conference calls between a maximum of six participants , including yourself. To have a private conver sation with one of the participants, select Options > Confe rence > Private . Select a participant, and press Private . The conference call is put on hold on your phone. The other participants can still continue the conference call. Once you have finished the private conversation, select Options > Add to conference to return to the conference call. To dr op a part icipa nt, se lect Option s > Confe rence > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conference call, press . Answer or reject a call To answer the call, press . To mute the ringing tone when a call comes in, select Silence . Tip! If a compatible headset is connected to the phone, answer and end a call by pressing the headset key. If you do not want to answer a call, press to reject it. The caller hears a line busy tone . If you have activated the Call divert > If busy function to divert call s, rejecting an incoming call also diverts the call. See âÂÂCall divertingâÂÂ, p. 94. When you reject an incoming c a ll, you can also send a text message to the caller informing why you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Sen d text me ssage . You can edit the text before sending it. See also Reject call with SMS , p. 87. Call waiting (n etwork service) You can answer a call while you have another call in progress if you have ac tivated Call waiting (network service) in Tools > Settings > Call > Call waiting . Tip! To change the phone tones for different environments and events, for example, when you wan t your phone to be silent, see âÂÂSet tonesâÂÂ, p. 12. To answer the waiting call, press . The first call is put on hold. To switch between the two calls, press Swap . Select Options > Tran sfer to connect an incoming call or a call
Make calls 23 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. o n h o l d w i t h a n a c t i v e c a l l a n d t o d i s c o n n e c t y o u r s e l f f r o m the calls. To end the active call, press . To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Options during a call Many of the options that you can use during a call are networ k services . Sele ct Options during a call fo r some of the following op tions: Mute or Unmute , Answer, Reject, Swap , Hold or Unhold , Activate handset , Activate loudsp. , or Activate hands free (if a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity is attached), End active call or End all calls , New call , Conference , and Transfer . Selec t from the following: Replace âÂÂTo end an active call and replace it by answering the waiting call. Send DTMF âÂÂTo send Dual Tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) tone strings, fo r example, a pass word. Enter the DT MF string or search for it in Cont acts. To enter a wait charac ter ( w ) or a pause ch aracter ( p ), press repeatedly. Select OK to send the tone. Tip! You can add DTMF tones to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. Log Recent calls To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dial led cal ls, pr ess , and selec t Connect. > Log > Recent calls . The phone registers missed and received calls only if the network su pports these functions, the phone is switched on, and within the networkâÂÂs se rvice area. Tip! When you see a note in the standby mode about missed calls, select Show to access the list of missed calls. To call back, scroll to a name or number, and press . Erasing recent call lists âÂÂTo clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear recent calls in the re cent cal ls main view. To clear one of the call registers, open th e register you want to erase, and select Opti ons > Clear list . To clear an individual even t, open a register, scroll to the event, and press . Call duration To monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select Connec t. > Log > Call duration .
Make calls 24 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Options > Clear timers . For this you need the lo ck code, see âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, âÂÂPhone and SIMâÂÂ, p. 91. Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connectio ns, press , and select Conne ct. > Log > Packet data . For example, you may be c harged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Icons in Log : Incom ing Outgoing Missed communication events To monitor all calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the phone, press , select Connect. > Log , and press to open the general log. For each communication event, you can see the se nder or recipient name, phone number, name of the service provider, or access point. You can filter the general log to view just one type of event and create new contact cards based on the log information. Tip! To view a list of sent messages, press , and select Messaging > Sent . Subevents, such as a text message sent in more than one part and packet data conne ctions, are log ged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre, or Web pages are shown as packet data connections. Note: When sending messages, your phone may disp lay Sent . This is an indication that the message has been sent by your phone to the message centre number programmed into your phone. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider.
Make calls 25 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To filter the log, sele ct Options > Filter and a filter. To erase th e contents of the log, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Option s > Clear log . Select Yes to confirm. To set the Log duration , select Options > Settings > Log duration . The log events remain in the phone memory for a set number of days after wh ich they are automatically erased to free memory. If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. Packet data counter and connection timer : T o view how much data, measured in kilobytes, has been transferred and how long a certain packet da ta connection has lasted, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicat ed by Pack. , and select Options > View details .
Contacts (Phonebook) 26 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) Press , and selec t Contacts . In Contacts you can add a personal ringing tone, voice t ag, or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You can also create cont act groups, which allow you to send text mess ages or e-mail to many recipient s at the same tim e. You can add re ceived conta ct informa tion (business ca rds) to cont acts. See âÂÂData an d settingsâÂÂ, p. 48. Contact information can only be se nt to or received fr om compatible devices. Options in Contacts are Open , Call , Create messag e , New contact , Open conversation , Edit, Delete , Duplicate , Add to gro up , Belongs to groups , Mark/Unmark , Copy , SIM contacts , Go to web address , Send , Contacts info , Settings , Help , and Exit . Save names and numbers 1 Select Options > New contact . 2 Fill in the fields th at you wa nt, and pres s Done . Options when editing a cont act card are: Add thumbnail , Remove thumbnail , Add detail , Delete detail , Edit label , Help , and Exit . To edit contact cards in Contacts , scroll to the co ntact card you want to edit, and select Options > Edit . To delete a contact card in Contacts , select a card, and press . To delete several conta ct cards at the same time, press and to mark the contacts, and press to delete. Tip! To add and edit contact card s, use Nokia Contacts Edi tor available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your phone. To attach a small thumbnail image to a contact card, open the contact card, and s elect Options > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. Default numbers and addresses You can assign default numbers or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a cont act has several numbers or addresses, you can easily ca ll or send a message to the contact to a cert ain number or addres s. 1 In contacts, select a contact, and press . 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an address you want to set as a default.
Contacts (Phonebook) 27 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Copy contacts Tip! To send contact informatio n, sele ct the card you want to send. Select Options > Send > Via text messag e , Via multimedia , or Via Bluetooth . See âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 42 and âÂÂSen d data using a Bluetooth connectionâÂÂ, p. 80. ⢠To copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your phone, press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory . Select the names you want to copy and Op tions > Copy to Contact s . ⢠To copy a telephone, fax, or pager number from contacts to your SIM ca rd, select Contacts , and open a contact card. Scroll to the number, and select Option s > Copy > To SIM d irectory . Tip! You can synchronise your contacts to a compatible PC with Nokia PC S uite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your phone. SIM directory and other SIM services Note: For availability, rates, and information on using SIM services, contact your SIM card vendor (network operator, service provider or other vendor). Press , and select Contact s > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory to see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In the SIM d irectory you can ad d, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, and yo u can make calls. Add ringing tones for contacts When a contact or group member calls you, the phone plays the chosen ri nging tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and yo ur phon e reco gnises it). Tip! Speed dialling is a quick way to call frequently used numbers. You can assign speed dia lling keys to eight phone numbers. See âÂÂSpeed dial a phone numberâÂÂ, p.21. 1 Press to open a contact card, or go to the groups list, and select a contact group. 2 Sele ct Options > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you wish to use for the individual contact or the selected group. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones.
Contacts (Phonebook) 28 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Voice dialling You can make a phone call by saying a voice tag that has been added to a contact card. Any spoken words can be a voice tag. Before using voice tags, note the following: ⢠Voice tags are not language-dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice. ⢠You must say the name exactly as you sa id it when you record ed it . ⢠Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags and use them in a quiet environment. ⢠Very short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers. Note: Using voice tags may be difficul t in a noisy environment or during an eme rgency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialling in all circums tances. Add a voice tag Example: You can use a personâÂÂs name as a voice tag (for example, âÂÂJohnâÂÂs mobileâÂÂ). You can have only one voice tag per contact card. You ca n add a voice tag to up to 50 phone numbers. 1 In Contac ts , open the contact card to which you want to add a voice tag. 2 Scroll to the number to which you want to add the voice tag, and select Opti ons > Add voice tag . Tip! To view a li st of voice tag s you have defi ned, select Contacts > Options > Contac ts inf o > Voice tags . 3 Select Start to record a voice tag. After the starting tone, say clearly the words you want to record as a voice tag. Wait until the phone plays the recorded tag and saves it. is displaye d next to th e number in the contact card, indicating that a voice tag has been added to i t. Make a call with a voice tag You must say the voice tag exact ly as you said it when you recorded it. When you are making a call by saying a voice tag, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the phone at a short distance away, an d say the voice tag clearly. Press and hold . A short tone is p layed, and the note Speak now is displayed. The phone plays the original voice tag, displays the name and number, and dials the number of the recognised voice tag. Tip! To listen to, change, or delete a voice tag, open a contact card, and scroll to the number that has a voice tag (indica ted by ). Select Optio ns > Voice tags > Playback , Change , or Delete .
Contacts (Phonebook) 29 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Create contact groups 1 In Contacts , press to open the groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group 1 , and select OK . 4 Open the group, and select Options > Add members . 5 Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Select OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a group, select Optio ns > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Options in the gro ups list view are Open , New group, Delete , Rename , Ringing tone , Contacts info , Se ttings , Help , and Exit . Remove members from a group 1 In the groups list, open the group you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remov e from group . 3 Select Yes to remove the contact from the group. Tip! To check to which groups a contact belongs, scroll to the contact, and select Options > Belongs to groups .
Camera and Gallery 30 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery Camera Respect the personal rights of others and obey the local laws, regulations, and customs when taking and using images or video clips. With the Camera application you can ta ke pictures and record videos while on the move. The images and video clips are automatically saved in the Gall ery application. The camera produces JPEG images, and video clips are record ed in the 3GP P file forma t with the .3gp fi le extension. You can also send images or video clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using a Bluetooth connection. Open the camera lens cover on the back of the phone to open the camera, or press Camera . The Camera application starts when the camera lens cover is open, and you can see the view to be captured. Press to move between Image and Video views. Tip! You can inser t an image into a contact car d. See âÂÂSave names and numbersâÂÂ, p. 26. The Nokia 6681 device supports an image captur e resolution of up to 1280 x 960 pixels. The image resolution in these materials may appear different. Take pictures Press or to move between Image and Video views. Open the Image view. Options be fore taki ng a picture are Cap ture , New , Flash , Activate night mode / Deact. night mode , Sequence mode / Normal mode , Self-timer , Go to Galle ry , Adjust , Settings , Help , and Exit . Camera indicators show the following: ⢠The phone memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators (1) show where images are saved. ⢠The images indicator (2) estimates how many images, depending on the selected image quality, can fit in the remaining memory of your phone or th e memory card. ⢠The zoom indicator (3) shows the zoom level. Press to zoom in, press to zoom out. ⢠The flash indicator (4) shows if the flash is On () , Off () , o r Automatic () .
Camera and Gallery 31 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. ⢠The night mode indicator (5) shows that the night mode is active. ⢠The sequence mode indicator (6) shows that sequence mode is active. See âÂÂTake pictures in a sequenceâÂÂ, p. 32. ⢠The self-timer indicator (7) shows how much tim e is left before a picture is taken. See âÂÂYou in the pictureâÂÂself-timerâÂÂ, p. 32. Shortcuts are as follows: ⢠Press to activate or deactivate night mode. ⢠Press to activate or deac tivate sequence mode. ⢠Press to adjust brightness. ⢠Press o to adju st contra st. To take a picture, press . Do not move the phone before the image is saved. The image is saved automatically in the Images folder of Gallery . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 35. Saving the captured i mage may ta ke longer i f you hav e changed the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. When taking a picture, note the followin g: ⢠It is recommended to use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠To take ima ges or record vi deo in a dark environment, use the night mode. If you are using the night mode, the exposure time is longer and the camera needs to be kept still long er. ⢠To make lighting and colour adjustm ents befo re taking a picture, select Options > Adjust > Brightness , Contra st , White balan ce , or Colour tone . See âÂÂAdjust colour and lightingâÂÂ, p. 32. ⢠The quality of a zoomed picture is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture, but the image remains the same size. You may notice the dif ference in image quality if viewed on a PC. ⢠Camera goes into battery saving mode if there are no key presses within a minute. T o continue taking pictures, press . After the image has been ta ken, no te the following: ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, press . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to take a new picture, press . ⢠To send the image via Bluetoot h , via e-mail , or Via multi media , press . For more information see âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 42 and âÂÂBluetooth conne ctionâÂÂ, p. 79. ⢠To set the picture as wallpaper in the stan dby mode, select Options > Set as wallpaper .
Camera and Gallery 32 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Take pictures in a sequence Select Options > Sequen ce mode to se t the camera to take six pictures in a sequence. After the pictur es are taken, they are automatically saved in Gallery , and are shown in a grid. You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer Use the self-timer to delay the takin g of a picture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, select Options > Self-time r > 10 seconds , 2 0 seconds , or 30 sec onds . Select Activate . Th e self-timer indicator ( ) blinks and the phone beeps when the timer is running. The camera takes the pictu re after the selected delay has elapsed. The flash The camera has an L ED flash for low light conditions. The following flash modes are available: On , Off , and Automatic . Select Options > Flash > On to use the flash. If the flash is set to Off or Automatic during bright conditions, the flash still emits a low light when an image is captured. This allows the subject of the picture to see when the picture is taken. Ther e is no flash effect on the resultant picture . Adjust colour and lighting To enable the camera to reproduce colours and lighting more accurately, or to add ef fects to your pictur es or vide os, s ele ct Option s > Adjust , and select from the following: Brightness âÂÂScroll left and right to select the appropriate brightness setting. Contrast âÂÂScroll left and right to select the appro priate contrast setting . White balanc e âÂÂSelect the current lighting condition fr om the list. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. Colour tone âÂÂSelect a colour effect f rom the list. The screen display changes to match any settings mad e, showing you how the final pictures or videos will look.
Camera and Gallery 33 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Adjust camera settings 1 Select Options > Settings > Image . 2 Scroll to the setting you want to change: Show captured image âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to see the captured image after it has been taken or No if you want to continue taking pictures immediately. Image quality â High , Normal , and Basic . The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. The quality of a zoom ed pictur e is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture, but the image remains the same size. You may notice the difference in image quality if viewed on a PC, for example. If you are going to print the image, select High or Normal image quality. Image resolution âÂÂSelect the resolutio n you want to use for the images you ar e going to take. Glossary: Resolution is a measure of sharpness and clarity of an image. Resolution refers to the number of pixels in an image. The more pixels, the more detailed the picture is, and the more memory it consumes. Default image name âÂÂSet a default name for the images you are going to take. You can replace the date with your own text (for example, âÂÂHoliday_2005âÂÂ). Memory in use âÂÂS elect where to store your images. Record videos Press or to move between Image and Video views. Open the Video view. Options before recording a video are Recor d , New, Activate night mode / Deact. night mode , Mute / Unmut e , Go to Gallery , Adjust , Settings , Help , and Exit . Video recorder indicators show the following: ⢠The phon e memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators (1) show where the video is saved. ⢠The current video length indicator (2 ) shows elapsed time and time remainin g. ⢠The zoom indicator (3) shows the zoom level. Pres s to zoom in on your subject before or during recording. Press to zoom out. ⢠The microphone indicator (4) shows that the microphone is muted. ⢠The night mode indicator (5) shows that the night mode is active. Short cuts ar e as fol lows:
Camera and Gallery 34 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Press to activate or deactivate the night mode. ⢠Press to adjust brightness. ⢠Press to adju st contra st. To make lighting and c olour adjustments before taking a picture, select Options > Adjust > Brightness , Contrast , White balance , or Colour tone . See âÂÂAdjust colour and lightingâÂÂ, p. 32. Press to start rec ording. The rec ord icon is shown. If you use the camera to record a v ideo clip, the LED flash is constantly on in low pow er mode, indicating that a video clip is being recorded. To pause recording at any time, press . The pause icon starts to blink on the display. Press again t o resume recording. Video recording automatically stops if recording is set to pause and there are no ke y presses within a minute. Select Stop t o stop recording. The video clip is automatically saved to the Vide o clips folder of Gallery . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 35. After a video clip has been recorded: ⢠To immed iately pl ay the vi deo clip you just reco rded, select Options > Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, press . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to record a new video, press . ⢠To send th e vide o via Bluetooth , via e-mail , or Via multimedia , press . For more information, see âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 42 and âÂÂBluetooth connectionâÂÂ, p. 79 . Adjust video recorder settings Select Options > Settings > Video and the setting you want to change: Length âÂÂIf you select Maximum , the length of the video recording is re stricted by the available space on your memory card, and up to one hour pe r clip. You cannot send a video clip recorded like this by MMS, due to the recording properties. Select Short to record video clips up to 300 kB (approximately 30 seco nd s in duration) so that they can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Some netwo rks, however, may o nly support sending of multimedia messages with a maximum size of 100 kB. Video resolution âÂÂSelect 128x96 or 176x144. Default video name âÂÂDefine a default name, or select the date. Memory in use âÂÂDefine the default memory store: phone memory or memory card.
Camera and Gallery 35 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Gallery To store and organise your im ages, sound clips, playlists, video clips, streaming links, and .ram files, pres s , and select Gallery . Select Images , Video cli ps , Tracks , Sound clips , Links , or All fi les , and press to open it. You can browse, open, and create folders; and mark, copy, and move items to folders. Sound clips, video clips, .ram files, and streaming links are opened and played in the RealPlayer application. See âÂÂRealPlayerâ¢âÂÂ, p. 39. Tip! You can transfer ima ges from your phone to a compatible PC with Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied wi th your phone. Tip! You can transfer music f iles from your phone to your memory card with Nokia Audio Manager available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your phone. Tip! You can also transfe r files from your phone to your memory card using the MMC card r eader supplied in the sales package. Press to open a file or a folder. Images are opened in the image viewer. See âÂÂView imagesâÂÂ, p. 35. To copy or move files to the memory card or to phone memory, select a file and Options > Organise > Copy to memory card / Move to memory ca rd or Copy to phone mem. / Move to phone mem. . Files stored on the memory card are indicated with . To download files into Gallery in one of the main folders using the browser, select Graphic downls. , Video downlds. , Track downlds. , or Sound downlds. . The browser opens, and you can select a bookmark from wh ich site to downl oad. To search for a file, select Option s > Find . Start to enter a s e a r c h s t r i n g ( f o r e x a m p l e , t h e n a m e o r d a t e o f t h e f i l e y o u are searching). Files that match your search are shown. View images Pictures taken with Camera are stored in Gallery . I mages can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through a Bluetooth connection. To be able to view a received image in the gallery, you need to save it in the phone memory or on a memory card. Open the Images folder in Gallery to start the image viewer, select an image, and press to view it. Options when viewing an image are Send , Set as wallpaper , Rotate , Zoom in / Zoom o ut , Full screen , Delete , Rename , View det ails , Add to 'Go to' , Help , and Exit .
Camera and Gallery 36 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. To zoom an image, selec t Options > Zo om in or Zoom out . You can see the zooming ratio at the top of the display. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To move the focus when you are zoomin g an image, use the scroll k ey. To see more of the image, select Options > Full screen . The panes around the image are removed. To rotate the image, select Options > Rotate . Press and hold to return to the normal view.
Imaging 37 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Imaging Video editor To creat e custo m video clips , press , and sele ct Imaging > Vid. editor . You can combine and trim vide o clips, and add soun d clips, tra nsitions, and effects. Transitions are visua l effects that you can add in the beginning and end of the video or between the video clips. Edit video, sound, and transitions 1 Mark and select one or more video clips. 2 Select Options > Ed it . In the edit video view, you can insert video clips to make a custom video c lip, and edit the clips by trimmi ng and adding effects. You can add sound cl ips and c hange their du ration. Tip! To take a snapshot of a video clip, select Options > Take snapshot in the play view, edit preview view, or in the cut view. To modify the video, select one of the following options: Preview âÂÂPreviews the custom video clip. Cut âÂÂTrims the video clip or a sound clip i n the cut video clip or in the cut sound clip view. Insert : ⢠Video clip âÂÂInserts the selected video clip. A thumbnail of the video clip is shown in the main view. A thumbnail consists of the first non-black view of the video clip. The name and length of the selected video clip is also shown. ⢠Sound clip âÂÂInserts the selected sound clip. The name and length of the selected sound clip is shown in the main view. ⢠New sound clip âÂÂRecords a new sound clip to the selected l ocation. Edit vi deo clip : ⢠Move âÂÂMoves th e video clip to the selected location. ⢠Add colour effect âÂÂInserts a colour effect on the video clip. ⢠Use slow motion âÂÂSlows the speed of the video clip. ⢠Mute sound / Unmute sound â Mutes or unmutes the original video clip sound. ⢠Remove âÂÂRemoves the video clip from the video. Edit so und clip : ⢠Move âÂÂMoves the sound clip to the selected location. ⢠Set duration âÂÂEdits the s ound clip length. ⢠Remove âÂÂRemoves the sound clip from the video.
Imaging 38 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Dupl icate âÂÂMakes a co py of the selected video clip or sound clip. Edit transition âÂÂThere are three types of transit ions: at the start of a video, at the end of a video, and transitions between video clip s. A start transiti on can be selected when the first transition of the video is active. 3 Select Save to save your video. Define the Memory in use in Se ttings . The default is the phone memory. Tip! In the settings view you can define the Default video name , Default sc. shot name , and Memory i n use . Select Send > Via multimedia , Via Bluetooth , o r Via e-mail if you want to send the video. Contact your service provider for details of the maximum multimedia message size that you ca n send. If your video is too large to be sent in a multimedia message, appears. Tip! If y ou wa nt to se nd a v id eo cl ip th at is ov er th e maximum multimedia message size allowed by your service provider, you can send the clip using a Bluetooth connection. âÂÂSend data using a Bluetooth connectionâÂÂ, p. 80. You can also transf er yo ur videos using a Bluetooth connection into your Bluetooth-enabled personal computer, or by using a memo ry card reader (internal/ external). Image manager To browse your images visua lly, press , and select Imagi ng > Image mgr. 1 Press to select Phone mem. or Memory card memory. Image mgr. also shows how many folders or images are in the selected folder. 2 Open a folder to browse your images visually. Press and to move between images and folders. Press to view an image. Press and simultaneously to mark images for an image show. A check mar k is shown next to a selected image. Select Options > Image show . Press and to view the next or previous image in the show. Image print Use Image print to print your images using USB (PictBridge-compliant), a Bluetooth connection, or your
Imaging 39 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. MMC. You can select from a list of available printers displayed in the printer selection view. Note: To print to a PictBridge-compliant printer, select Image print before you connect the USB cable. Press , and select Imaging > Image print . Select the images you want to print. Options in the image selection view are Print , Mark/ Unmark , Open (displayed when you select an album), Help , and Exit . Printer selection Once you have se lected ima ges you want to pr int, a list of available printing devices is displayed. If you have connected a PictBridge-compliant USB printer using the DKU-2 cable supplied with the phone, the printer is automatically displayed. Select the device you want to use. The print preview screen is displayed. Print preview After you select a printing device, the images that you selected are displayed using pr edefined layouts. To change the layout, use the left and right scroll key to scroll through the available layouts for the selected printer. If you selected more images than will fit on a single page, scroll up or down to display the additional pages. Options in print preview are Print , S ettings, Help, and Exit . Print settings The available options vary depending on the capabi lities of the printing device you selected. To select the paper size, select Paper size , select the size of paper from the list, and select OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. RealPlayer⢠Press , and select Imaging > RealPlayer . With RealPlaye r , you can play video clips, sound clips, and playlists , or stream media files over the ai r. A stream ing link can be activated when you are browsing Web pag es, or it can be stored in the phone memory or memory card. RealPlaye r supports files with ext ensions such as .aac, .awb, .m4a, .mid, .mp3, and .wav. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. For example, RealPlayer attempts to open all .mp4 files, but some .mp4 files may
Imaging 40 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. include content that is not compliant with 3GPP standards and, therefore, is not supported by this phone. Options in RealPlayer when a clip is sele cted are Play , Play in full sc reen / Continue , Continue in full s cr. ; Stop , Mute / Unmute , Clip details , Send, Se ttings , Help, and Exit . Play video or sound clips 1 To play a media file stored in phone memory or on the memory card, select Options > Open and select: Most recent clips âÂÂTo play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer . Saved clip âÂÂTo play a file saved in Gallery . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 35. 2 Scroll to a file, and press to play the file. Tip! To view a video clip i n full screen mode, press . Press again to change back to n ormal screen mode. Icons in RealPlayer : Repe at Random Repeat and rand om Loudspeak er muted Shortcuts during play: To fast forward , press and hold . To rewind through the media file, press and hold . To mute the sound, press a nd hold until the indicator is displayed. To turn on the sound, press and hold until you see the indicator. Stream content over the air Many service providers requir e you to use an Intern et access point (IAP) for your default a ccess point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. The access points may be conf igured when you first start your phone. Contact your serv ice provider for m ore informa tion. Note: In RealPlayer , you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer will recognise an http link to a .ram file. To stream content ov er the air, s elect a streaming link saved in Gallery , on a Web page, or received in a text message or multimedia mess age. Before live content begins streaming, your phone connects to the site and start loading the content. Receive RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a sp ecial text message from the network oper ator or service provider.
Imaging 41 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 48. For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Change the RealPlayer settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Video âÂÂTo select if y ou want to automatically repeat video clips after they finish playing. Audio âÂÂTo select if you want t o repeat playing of trac k lists and play sound clips on a track list in random order. Connection âÂÂTo select whether to use a proxy server, change the default access poi nt, and set the time- outs and port range used when connecting. Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Proxy setting s : ⢠Use proxy âÂÂTo use a proxy server, select Yes. ⢠Proxy serv . address âÂÂEnter the IP addr ess of the proxy server. ⢠Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the port number of the proxy se rver . Glossary : Proxy servers are intermediate server s between media servers and their user s. Some service providers use them to provide additional security or speed up access to browser pages th at contain sound or video clips. Network settings : ⢠Default access point âÂÂScroll to the access poi nt you want to use to connect to the Internet, an d press . ⢠Online time âÂÂSet the time for RealPlayer to disconnect from the network when you have paused a media clip playing through a network link, select User defined , and press . Enter the time, and select OK . ⢠Connection time-out âÂÂPress or to set the maximum time to elapse between selecting a network link and connecting to the media serv er, and select OK . ⢠Server time-o ut âÂÂPress or to se t the maximum time to wait for a response from the media server before di sconne cting, and select OK . ⢠Lowest UDP port âÂÂEnter the lowest port number of the server port range. The minimum value is 6970. ⢠Highest UDP port âÂÂEnter the highest port number of the server port range. The maximum value is 32000. Sele ct Options > Advanced settings to edit the bandwidth values for different networks.
Messaging 42 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging Press , and select Messa ging . In Messaging , you can create, send, receive, view, edit, and organise text messages, multimedia messa ges, e-mail messages, a nd special text messages cont aining data. You can also receive messages and data through a Bluetooth connection, receive Web serv ice messages, cell broadcast messages, and send service commands. Options in the Messaging main view are Open , Create message , Conne ct (shown if you have defined mailbox settings)/ Disconnect (shown if a connection to the mai lbox is active ), SIM me ssages , Cell broadcast , Service command , Settings, Help , and Exit . Note: These functions can only be used if they are supported by your networ k operator or service provider. Only devices that offer comp atible multimedia message, or e- mail features can rece ive and display these messages. Some networks might provide the recipient device with a Web page link to view multimedia mess ages. When you open Messaging , you can s ee the New message function and a list of folders: Inbox âÂÂContains received me ssages exce pt e-ma il and cell broadcast messages. E- mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . My folders âÂÂFor organising your messages into folders. Mailbox âÂÂIn Mailbox you can connect to your remote mailbox to retr ieve yo ur new e-mail messages or view your previously retrieve d e-mail messages offline. See âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. Drafts âÂÂStores draft messages that have not be en sent. Sent âÂÂStores the last 20 messages that have bee n sent excluding messages sent using a Bluetooth connection. To change the number of messages to be saved, see âÂÂOther settingsâÂÂ, p. 56. Outbox âÂÂA temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Reports âÂÂYou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service ). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message tha t has been sent to an e-mail address mi ght not be possible.
Messaging 43 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Tip! When you have opened any of the default fol ders, you can switch between the folders by pressing or . To enter and send ser vice requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network services, to your service provider, select Options > Service command in the main view of Messaging . Cell broadcast is a network service that allows you to receive messages on various topics, such as weather or traffic conditions from your se rvice provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, co ntact your service provider. In the main view of Messaging , select Options > Cell broadcast . In the main view you can see the status of a topic, a topic number, name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow- up. Options in Cell b roadcast are Open , Subscribe / Unsubscribe , Hotmark / Remove hotmar k , Topic , Settings , Help , and Exit . A packet data connection ma y prevent cell broadcast reception . Write text Traditional text input and indicate the selected ca se. means that the first letter of the wo rd is written in upper case, and all other letters are auto matically written in lower case. indica tes number mode. is shown on the top righ t of the display when you are writing text using traditional text input. ⢠Press a number key ( â ) repeatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key tha n are printed on the key. ⢠To insert a number, press and hold the number key. ⢠To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appear s (or press to end the time-out period), and enter the lett er. ⢠To erase a ch aracter, pres s . Press a nd hold to clear more than one character. ⢠The most common punctuat ion marks are available under . Press repeatedly to reach the desire d punctuat ion mark.
Messaging 44 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Press to open a list of special charac ters. Use to move through the list, and press Select to select a char acter. ⢠To inser t a space, press . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠To switch between the diffe rent character cases Abc , abc , and ABC , press . Predictive text inputâÂÂDictionary You can enter any letter with a single key press. Predictive text input is based on a built-in dictionary t o which you can also add new words. When the dic tionary becomes full, the latest added word replaces the oldest. 1 To activate predictive text input, press , and select Dictionary on . This activates predictive text input for all editors in the phone. is shown on the top right of the display when you write text using predictive text input. 2 To write the desired word, press the keys â . Press each key only once for one letter. For example, to write âÂÂNokiaâ when the Engl ish dictionary is selected , press for N, for o, for k, fo r i, and for a. The word suggestion changes after each key press. 3 When you finish writing the word and it is correct, to confirm it, press , or press to add a space. If the word is not correct, press repeatedly to view the matching words th e dictionary has found one by one, or press , and select Dictionary > Matches . If the ? charac ter is shown afte r the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictio nary. To add a word to the dictionary, select Spell , enter the word (up to 32 letters) using traditional text input, and select OK . The word is a dded to the dicti o nary. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 4 Start writing the next word. Tip! To set predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly. Tips on predictive text input To erase a character, pres s . Press and hold to c lear more than one character. To change between the different character cases Abc , abc , and ABC , press . If you press quickly twice, predictive text input is turned off. Tip! Predictive text input tries to guess which commonly used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is needed. The
Messaging 45 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. order and availability of the punctuation marks d epend on the language of the dictionary . To insert a number in letter mode, press and hold the desired number key. To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . The most common punctuation marks are available under . Press and then repeatedly to search for the desired punctuation mark. Press and hold to open a list of special characters. Press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one. Press , select Dictionary , an d pre ss to s elec t one o f the following op tions: Matches âÂÂTo view a list of words that correspond to your key presses. Insert word âÂÂTo add a word (up to 32 letters) to the dictionary by using traditional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest adde d word. Edit word âÂÂTo edit the word using traditional text input. This is available if the word is active (underlined). Tip! When you press , the following options appear (depending on the editing mode): Dictionary (predictive text input), Alpha mode (traditional text input), Number mode , Cut (if text has been selected), Copy (if te xt has b een se lected), Pas te (when text has been cut or copied first), Insert number , Insert symbol , and Writ ing lang uage: (cha nges th e input lan guage for all editors in the phone). Write compound wo rds Write the first half of a compound word; to confirm it, press . Write the last part of the compound word. To complete the compound word, press to add a space. Turn predictive text inp ut off Press , and sel ect Dictionary > Off to turn predictive text input off for all editors in the phone. Copy text to clipboard 1 To select letters and words, press and ho ld . At the same time, press or . As the selection moves, text is highlighted. 2 To copy the text to the clipboard, while still holding , press Copy . 3 To insert the text into a document, press and hold , and press Paste , or press once, and select Paste . To select lines of text, press and hold . At the same time press or .
Messaging 46 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. To remove the selected text from the document, press . Write and send messages The appearance of a multim edia message may vary, depending on the receiving device. Copyright protections may prevent some images, ring ing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Tip! You ca n start to create a message from any application that has the opti on Send . Select a file (image or text) to be added to the messag e, and select Options > Send . Before you can c reate a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See âÂÂReceive MMS and e-mail settingsâÂÂ, p. 47 and âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. Options in the message editor are Send , Add recipient , Insert , Attach ments (e-mail), Preview (MMS), Objects (MMS), Remove (MMS), Delete , Check contacts , Message details , Sendi ng options , Help , and Exit . 1 Select New message . A list of message options opens. Text m essage âÂÂto send a text message. Multimedia message âÂÂto send a multimedia message (MMS). E-mail âÂÂto send an e-mail. If you have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. Tip! Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. You can mark several recipients at a time. 2 Press to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. Press to add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients. You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3 Press to move to the message field. 4 Write the message. 5 To add a medi a object to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert object > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . When sound is added, is shown in the navigation bar. 6 If you sel ect Insert new > Sound clip , Reco rder opens, and you can record a new sound. Press Select , the new sound is automatically saved, and a copy is inserted in the message. Select Opt ions > Preview to see what the multimedia message looks like.
Messaging 47 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. 7 To add an attachm ent to an e-mail, se lect Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , or Note . E-mail attachments are indicated by , in the navigation bar. 8 To send the message, select Options > Send , or press . Note: Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the normal 160-character limit. If your message exceeds 160 charac t e r s , i t w i l l b e s e n t a s a series of two or more me ssages and sending ma y cost you more. In the navigation bar , you can see the message length indicator counting backwards from 160. For example, 10 (2) means that you can still add 10 characters for the text to be sent as two messages. Some characters may take more space than others. Note: E-mail messa ges are au tomatically placed in Outbox before sending. If sending does not succeed, the e-mail is left in the Outbox with the Failed status. Tip! When you send a multimedia message to an e- mail address or a de vi ce that supports the receiving of large images, use the larger image size. If you ar e not sure of the receiving device, or the network does not support sending large files, it is recommended that you use a smaller image size or a sound clip that is no longer than 15 seconds. To change the setting, select Options > Settings > Multimedia me ssage > Imag e size in the Me ssaging main view. Tip! In Mess aging you can also create presentations and send them in a mu ltimedia message. In the multimedia message editor view, select Optio ns > Create presentation (shown only if MMS cre ation mode is set to Guide d or Free ). See âÂÂMultimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 53. Receive MMS and e-mail settings You may receive the settings in a text message from your network operator or service provider. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 48 . For availability of and subscr iption to data services, contact your network operator or service provider. Follow the instructions given by your service provider. Enter the M MS setti ngs manu ally 1 Sele ct Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points , and define the settings for a multimedia messaging access point. See âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. 2 Sele ct Messaging > Options > Settings > Mult imedia messag e > Access point in use and the access point you created to be used as the preferred connection. See also âÂÂMultimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 53. Tip! To send files other than sounds and n otes as attachments, open the appropriate app lication, and select Send > Via e-mail , if available.
Messaging 48 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Before you can send, receive, ret rieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, y ou must do the following: ⢠Configure an Internet access point (IAP) correctly. See âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. ⢠Define your e-mail settings corre ctly. See âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. You need to have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions give n by y our remote mailbox and Internet service provider (ISP). InboxâÂÂreceive messages Inbox icons: Unread messages in Inbox Unread text message Unread multimedia message Data rece ived throug h a Blueto oth conn ection When you receive a message, 1 new message is shown in the stan dby mode . Press Show to op en the message. To open a message in Inbox , scro ll to it, and press . Multimedia message s Import ant: Multimedi a mess age objects may contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Do not open any atta chment if yo u are not sure of the trustworth iness of the sender. When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a mess age, and simultaneou sly listen to a sound through the loudspeaker ( is shown if sound is included). Press the scroll key to lis ten to the sound. To see what kind s of media obj ects have been included in the multimedia message, open the message, and select Options > Obje cts . You can choose to sa ve a multimed ia object file in your phone or send it, for example, through a Bluetooth connection to an other compatible dev ice. You may also receive multimedia pr esentations. You can view these presentations by selecting Options > Play presentation . Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Data and settings Your phone can receive many kinds of text messa ges that contain data ( ), also called over-the-air (OTA) messages: Configuration message âÂÂYou may receive a text message service number, voice mail box number, Internet access point settings, access point login script settings, or e-mail settings from your network ope rator, service provider , or company information manage ment department in a configuration messag e. To save the settings, select Options > Save all .
Messaging 49 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Busines s card â To save the in formation to Contacts , select Option s > Save bu siness card . Certificat es or sound files attached to the business card are not saved. Ringing to ne âÂÂTo save the ringing tone, select Op tions > Save . Operator logo âÂÂFor the logo to be shown in the standby mode instead of the network operatorâÂÂs own identification, select Options > Save . Tip! To change the default access point settings for multimedia messaging, select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Access point in use . Calendar entry âÂÂTo save the invitation, select Options > Save to Calendar . Web message âÂÂTo save the bookmark to the bookmarks list in Web, select Options > Add to bookmarks . If the message contains both access point settings and bookmarks, to save the data, select Options > Save all . E-mail noti fication âÂÂTells you how many ne w e-mail s you have in your remote mailbox. An extended notification may list more detailed information. Tip! If you receive a vCard file that has a picture attached, the picture is saved to contac ts. Web service messages Web service messages ( ) are noti fications (for example, news headlines) and may contain a text message or a link. For availability and subscription, contact your service provi der . My folders In My folders , you can organise your messages into folders, create new folders, and rename and delete folders. Tip! You can use texts in the templates folder to avoid rewriting messages that you send often. Mailbox If you select Mailbox and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. See âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes.
Messaging 50 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Open the mailbox When you open the mailbox, you can choose whether you want to view the previously retrieve d e-mail messages and e-mail headings offline or connect to the e-mail server. When you scroll to your mailbox, and press , the phone asks you if you want to Connect to mailbox? Select Yes to connect to your mailbox, and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages . When you view messages online, you are continuous ly connected to a remote mailbox using a packet data connection. See also âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. Select No to view previously re trieved e-ma il messages offline. When you vie w e-mail messages offline, your phone is not connected to the remote mailbox. Retrieve e-mail messages If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to a remote mailbox. Import ant: E-mail messages may contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustwor thiness of the se nder. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e -mail . New âÂÂto retrieve all new e-mail messages to your phone. Selected âÂÂto retrieve only the e-mail messages that have been marked. All âÂÂto retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving mess ages, select Cancel . 2 After you have retrieved the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online, or select Options > Disconnect to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline. E-mail status icons: New e-mail (offline or online mode): the content has not been retrieved to your phone (arrow outwards). New e-mail: the content has been retrieved to your phone (arrow inwards). The e-mail message has been read. The e-mail heading that has been read and the message content has been deleted from the phone. 3 To open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrieved (arr ow in the icon is pointing outwards) and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve t his message from the mailbox.
Messaging 51 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To view e-mail attachments, open a message that h as the attach ment indica tor , and sel ect Options > Attachments . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the phone; select Options > Retrie ve . In the Attachment s view, you can retriev e, open, or save attachments. You can also send attachments using a Bluetooth connection. Tip! If your mailbox uses th e IMAP4 protocol, you can define how many messages to retrieve, and whether to retrieve the attachments. With the POP3 protocol, the options are Headers only , Partially (kB) , o r Msgs. & attach s. . Delete e-mail messages To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the phone while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Option s > Delete ms g. from: > Phone only . The phone mirrors the e-mail headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your ph o n e . I f y o u w a n t t o r e m o v e the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, and then make a connection from your phone to the remote mailbox again to update the status. Tip! To copy an e-mail from the remote mailbox to a folder under My folders , select Opti ons > Copy to folder , a folder from the list, and OK . To delete an e-mail from the phone and the remote mailbox, select Option s > Delete ms g. from: > Phone and serve r . If you are offline, the e-mail is deleted first from your phone. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it is automatically deleted fr om the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only after you have closed the connection to the remote mailbox. To cancel deleting an e-ma il from the phone and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Options > Undelete . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, select Options > Disconnect to end the packet data connection to the remote mailbox. Tip! You can also leave your mailbox connection open and the new e-mails ( Headers only as default) will be retrieved from the remote mailbox to your phone automatically (only if the IMAP IDLE function is supported by your server). To leave the messaging application open in the background, press twice. Leavin g the connec tion o pen may in crease y our call costs due to the data traffic.
Messaging 52 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. View e-mail messa ges when offline When you open Mailbox the next time and you want to view and read the e-mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? qu ery. You ca n read the previously retrieved e-mail he adings, the retrieved e-mail messages, or both. You can also write new, reply to, or forward e-mail to be sent the next time you connect to the mailbox. OutboxâÂÂmessages waiting to be sent Outbox is a tempora ry storage p lace for m essages wait ing to be sent. Status of the messages in Outbox ar e: Sending âÂÂA connection is being made and the message is being sent. Waiting / Queued âÂÂThe message will be sent when previous message s of a si milar t ype have been s ent. Resend at %U (time)âÂÂThe phone will try to send the message again after a time-out peri od. Select Options > Send to restart the sending immediately. Deferred âÂÂYou can set documents to be on hold while they are in Outbox . Scroll to a message that is being sent, and select Op tions > Defer sending . Failed âÂÂThe maximum number of sending attempts has been reached. Sending has f ailed. If you were trying to send a text message, open the message, and check that the sending options are correct. Example: Messages are placed in the outbox, for example, when your phone is outside network coverage. You can also schedule e-mail me ssages to be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox. View messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messa g es, you need to copy them to a folder in your phone. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 Select a folder and OK to start copying. Open the folder to view the messages. Messaging settings Text messages Select Messaging > Opt ions > Settings > Text message .
Messaging 53 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Message centres âÂÂLists all the text message centres that have been defined. Msg. c entre in use âÂÂSelect which message centre is use d for delivering text messages. Receive report (network service)âÂÂTo request the network to send delivery reports on your messages. Wh en set to No , only the Sent status is shown in Log. See âÂÂLogâÂÂ, p. 23. Message validity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity pe riod, t he message is removed from the text message cent re. The network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. Message sent as âÂÂChange this option only if you are sure that your message centre is able t o convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your network operator. Preferred connecti on âÂÂYou can send text messages through the normal GSM network or through packet da ta, if supported by the network. See âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. Reply via same ctr. (network service)âÂÂChoose Yes , if you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message centre number. Options when editing text message centre settings are Ed it , New msg. ce ntre , Delete , Help , and Exit . Add a new text m essage centre 1 Sele ct Message centres > Options > New msg. centre . 2 Press , write a name for the message centre, and select OK . 3 Press and , and write the number of the text message centre. You receive the n umber from your service provider. 4 Sele ct OK . 5 To use the new sett ings, go back to the s ettings view. Scroll to Msg. centre in use , and select the new message centre. Multimedia messages Sele ct Messaging > Options > Settings > Mult imedi a message . Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia message. The options are Origin al (shown only when the MMS creati on mode is set to Guided or Free ), Small , and Large . Select Original to increase the size of th e multimedia message. MMS creati on mode âÂÂIf you select Gu ided , the phone informs you if you try to se nd a message that may not be supported by the recipient. Select Res trict ed ; the phone prevents you from sending messages that are not supported.
Messaging 54 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Access point in use (Must be defined)âÂÂSelect which access point is used as the preferre d connection for the multimedia message centre. Recept. in h ome net. âÂÂSelect whether you w ant the reception of the MMS messages in the home network to be Automatic , Defer retrieval , or Off . If you select Defer retrieva l , the multimedia messag ing ce ntre saves the message. To retrieve th e me ssage late r, set to A utomatic . Receptio n if roaming âÂÂSelect how you want the MMS messages to be retrieved outside the home network. When you are outside your home network, sending and rece iving multimedia messages may cost you more. If Reception if roami ng > Automatic is selected, your phone automatically makes an active packet d ata connection to retrieve the message. Select Reception if roaming > Off if you do not want to receive multimedia messages when you are outside your home network. Allow anon. messages âÂÂSelect No if you want to reject messages com ing from an anon ymous sender. Receive adverts âÂÂDefine whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements or not. Receive report (network service)âÂÂSelect Yes if you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the Log. Note: Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sen t to an e-mail address might not be possible. Deny report sending âÂÂSelect Yes if you do not want your phone to send delivery repor ts of received multimedia messages. Message validit y âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity period, the mess age is removed from the multimedia messagin g cent re. The network must support this feature. Maximum ti me is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. Tip! You may also obtain the multimedia and e-mail settings from your service provider through an OTA message. Contact your service provider for more information. See âÂÂData an d settingsâ on p. 48. E-mail Select Messaging > Opt ions > Settings > E- mail , or in the mailbox main view, select Options > E-mail settings , and from the following: Mailbox in use âÂÂSelect which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail. Mailboxes âÂÂOpens a list of mailbo xes that have been defined. If no ma ilboxes have been defi ned, you are prompted to do so. Select a mailbox to change the settings: Mailbox settin gs : Mailbox name âÂÂEnter a descriptive name for the mailbox.
Messaging 55 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Access point in use ( Must be defin ed )âÂÂChoose an Internet access point (IAP) for t he mailbox. See âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. My e-mail ad dress ( Must be define d )âÂÂEnter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Replies to your messages are sent to this address. Outgoing mail server ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e-mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your network operator. Contact your service provider for more info rmation. Send message âÂÂDefine how e-mail is sent from your phone. Select Immedia tely for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . Select When conn. avail. âÂÂE-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. User name âÂÂEnter your user name, given to you by your service provider. Password: âÂÂEnter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are p rompted for th e password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incomi ng mail s erver ( Must be define d )âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Mailbox type: âÂÂDefines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings. If you are using the POP3 protocol, e-mail messages are not updated automatically in online mode. To see the latest e-mail messages, you must disconnect and make a new connection to your mailbox. Security (ports) âÂÂUsed with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. APOP secure log in (not shown if IMAP4 is se lected for Mailbox type )âÂÂUsed with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecti ng to the mailbo x. User settings : E-mails to retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂDefine how many new e-mails are retrieved to the mailbox. Retriev e âÂÂDefine which part s of th e e-mails ar e retrieved: Headers only , Partial ly (kB) , or Msgs . & attach s. (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to IMAP4). Retrieve attachments (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂChoose whether you want to retrieve e-mail with or without at tachments.
Messaging 56 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Subscribed folders (not shown if the e- mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂYou can subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox as well and re trieve content from thos e folders. Send copy to se lf âÂÂSelect Yes to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e-mail address . Include signature â Select Yes if you want to atta ch a signature to your e- mail messages. My name âÂÂEnter your own name here. Your name replac es your e-mail address in the r ecipientâÂÂs phone when the recipientâÂÂs phone suppor ts this function. Automatic retrieval : Header retrieval âÂÂWhen this function is on, messages are retrieved automatically. You can define when, and how often, the messages are retrieved. Activating Header retrieval may increas e your call cos ts due to the data traffic. Web service messages Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Service message . Choose whether you want to receive serv ice messages. If you want to set the phone to automatically activate the browser and st art a network connectio n to retrieve con tent when the phone r eceives a service message, select Download messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast Check the available topics and related topic numbers wi th your service provider, and select Me ssaging > Options > Settings > Cell broadc ast to change the settings. Recepti on âÂÂSelect On to receive cell broadcas t messages, or Off if you do not wis h to receive cell broadcast messages. Language â All allows you to receive cell broadcast messages in all su pported languages. Selected allows you to choose in which languages you wis h to receive cell broadcast messages. If yo u cannot find the desired language , select Other . Topic detection âÂÂIf you select On , the phone automatically searches for new topic numbers, and s aves the new numbers without a name to the topic list. Select Off if you do not want to save ne w topic numbers automatically. Other settings Select Messaging > Opt ions > Sett ings > Oth er .
Messaging 57 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Save sent messages âÂÂChoose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to the Sent folder. No. of saved msgs. âÂÂDefine how many sent messages are saved to the Sent folder at a time. The default limit is 20 messages. When the limit is re ached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use âÂÂChoose the memory to where you want to save your messages: Phone memory or Memory card . Tip! If Memory ca rd is selected, activate the offline profile before opening the memory card slot door or removing the memory card. Wh en the memory card is not available, messages are saved in the phone memory. New e-mail alerts âÂÂChoose whether you want to see the new e-mail indications, a tone, or a note when new mail is received to the mailbox.
Calendar 58 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar Shortcut : Press any key ( â ) in any calendar view. A meeting entry opens, and the characters you enter are added to the Su bject field. Create calendar entries 1 Press , and select Calendar > Optio ns > New entry and from the following: Meeting âÂÂTo remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time. Memo âÂÂTo write a general entry for a day. Anniversary âÂÂTo remind you of birthdays or special dates. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. 2 Fill in the fields. Use to move between fields. Alarm (meetings and anniversary)âÂÂSelect On , and press to fill in the Alarm time and Alarm date fields. in the day view indicates an alarm. To stop a calendar alar m, select Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. The reminder text stays on the screen. Select Stop to end the calendar alarm. Select Snooze to set the alarm to snooze. Repeat âÂÂPress to change the entry to be repeating ( is shown in the day view). Repeat until âÂÂYou can set an end date for the repeated entry. Synchronisation : Private âÂÂAfter synchronisation the calendar entry can be seen only by you and it wi ll not be shown to others with online access to view the calendar. Public âÂÂThe calendar entr y is shown to others who have access to view your calendar online. None âÂÂThe calendar entry will not be copied to your PC when you synchronise. 3 To save the entry, select Done . Tip! To send a calen dar note to a compatible phone, select Options > Send > Via text message , Via multime dia , Via Bluetooth , or Via e- mail (available only if the correct e-mail setti ngs are in plac e).
Calendar 59 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Calendar views Tip! Select Options > Settings to change the view that is shown when you open th e calendar or the starting day of the week. In the month view, dates that have calendar entries are marked with a small triangle at the rig ht bottom corner. In the week view, memos and anniversaries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. Icons in the day and week views: Memo Anniversary There is no icon for Meeti ng . To go to a certain date, select Options > Go to date , write the date, and select OK . Press to jump to today. Tip! You can mov e calendar and to-do data from many different Nokia phones to your phone or synchronise your calendar and to-do to a compatible PC using Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with the phone. Set a calendar alarm You can set an alarm to r emind you of a meeting or anniversary. This option is n ot available fo r notes. 1 Open an entry in which you want t o set an alarm, and select Alarm > On . 2 Set th e Alarm time and Alar m date . 3 Scroll down to Repeat , and press to select how often you want the alarm to be repeat ed. 4 Sele ct Done . To delete a calendar al arm, op en the entry in which you want to delete an alarm, and select Alarm > Off . Remove calendar entries Removing past entr ies in Calendar saves sp ace in your phone me mory. To remove more than one event at a time, go to the Month view and sel ect Option s > Delete entry and one of the following: Before date âÂÂDeletes all calendar en tries that take place before a certain date you define. All entries âÂÂDeletes all calendar entries. Calendar settings To modify the Calendar alarm tone , Default view, Week starts on , and Week view titl e , select Options > Settings .
Web 60 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web Various service providers ma intain pages specifically designed for mobile devices. To access t hese pages, press , and select Web . These pages use the wireless markup language (WML), extensible h ypertext markup la nguage (XHTML), or hypertext markup language (HTML). Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator or service provid er. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Shortcut: To start a conn ection, press and hold in the standby mode. Access the Web ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the Web page that you want to use. See the sections âÂÂReceive browser settingsâÂÂ, p. 60 or âÂÂEnter the settings manuallyâÂÂ, p. 60. ⢠Make a connection to the Web. See âÂÂMake a connectionâÂÂ, p. 61. ⢠Start browsing the pages. See âÂÂBrowseâÂÂ, p. 62. ⢠End the connection to the Web. See âÂÂE nd a connectionâÂÂ, p. 64. Receive browser settings Tip! Settings may be available on the Web site of a network operator or service provider. You may receive Web service settings in a special text message from the network oper ator or service provider that offers the Web page. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 48. For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Enter the settings manually Follow the instructions given to you by yo ur service provider. 1 Select Tools > Se ttings > Conne ction > Access points , and define the settings for an access point. See âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. 2 Select Web > Opti ons > Book mark manager > Add bookmark . Write a name f or the bookmark and the address of the page define d for the curren t access point.
Web 61 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Bookmarks view Glossary: A bookmark consist s of an Internet address (mandatory), bookmark title, access point, and if the Web page requires, a user name and p assword. Options in the bookmarks view are Open , Download , Back to page , Bookmark manager , Mark/Unmark , Navi gation opti ons , Advanced options , Send , Find bookmark , Deta ils , Sett ings , Help , and Exit . Note: Your device may have some bookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these site s. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions, for security or content, as yo u would with any Internet site. Icons in the bookmark view: The starting page defined for the default access point. If you use another default access point for browsing, the starting page is changed accordingly. The automatic bookmarks folder contains b ookmarks ( ) that are collected automatically when yo u browse pages. The bookmarks in this folder are automatical ly orga nised acco rdin g to domain . Any bookmark showing the ti tle or Internet address of the bookmark. Add bookmarks manually 1 In the bookmarks view, select Options > Bookmark manager > Add bookmark . 2 Start to fill in the fields. Only the URL address must be defined. The default access point is assig ned to the bookmark if no other one is selected. Press to enter special characters such as / , . , : , and @ . Press to clear characters. 3 Sele ct Options > Sa ve to save the bookmark. Send bookmarks Scroll to a bookmark, and select Opt ions > Send > Via text mes sage . Press to send. It is possible to send more than one bookmar k at the same time. Make a connection Once you have stored all the required connection settings, you can a ccess the pages. 1 Select a bookmark or enter the address in the field ( ). When you enter the address, matching bookmarks are shown above the field. Press to select a matching bookmark. Options when browsing (depending on the page you are viewing) are Open , Accept, Remove file, Open in viewer , Ope n Wallet , Service options ,
Web 62 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Bookmarks , Save as bookmark , View images , Navi gation o ptions , Advanced options , Show images , Send bookmark , Fi nd , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . 2 Press to st art to download the page. Connection security If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmis sion between the device and the Internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between the gate way and the content server (or place where the requested re source is stored) is secur e. The service provider secures the data transmi ssion between the gateway and the content server. Select Options > Details > Security to view de tail s about the connecti on, encrypti ons status, and inf ormation about serv er and us er authentication. Security features may be required for some services, s uch as banking services. For such connectio ns you need security certifica tes. For more information, contact your service provider. See also âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 93. Browse On a browser page, new links appear underlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images that act as links have a blue border around them. To open a link, to check boxes, and make select ions, press . To go to the previous p age while browsing, select Back . If Back is not available, select Options > Nav igati on opti ons > History to view a chronological list of the pages you have visited during a browsing session. The history list is cleared each time a session is closed. To retrieve the latest content from the server, select Options > Navi gation opti ons > Reload . To save a bookmark, select Options > Save as bookmark . Tip! To access the bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold down . To return to the browser view, select Options > Back to page . To save a page while browsing, select Options > Advanced options > Save page . You can save pages to the ph one memory or on a memory card, and browse them when offline. To access the pages later, pr ess in the bookmarks view to open the Save d pages view. To enter a new URL address, select Options > Navigation options > Go to we b address .
Web 63 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To open a sublist of commands or actions for the currently open page, select Options > Service options . You can download items such as r inging tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your phone, for example, a downloaded image is saved in Gallery . Shortcut: Use to jump to the end of a page and to the beginning of a page. Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from b eing copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Important: Only install software from sour ces that offer adequate protection agai nst harmful software. To download and view new We b service messages while browsing, select Options > Advanced options > Read service msgs. (shown only if there are new messages). See also âÂÂWeb service messagesâÂÂ, p. 49. Tip! Your browser coll ects bookmarks automa tically while you are browsing Web pages. The bookmarks are stored to the automatic bookmarks folder ( ) and automatically organised according to domain. See also âÂÂWeb settingsâÂÂ, p. 64. View saved pages If you regularly browse pa ges containing information which does not cha nge very often, you can sa ve and browse them when offline. In the saved pages view you can also c reate fo lders to st ore your saved browser pages. Options in the saved pages vi ew are Open , Back to page , Reload , Saved pages , Mark/Unmark , Navigation o ptions , Advanced options , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . To open the saved pages view, press in the book marks view. In the saved pages view, press to open a saved page ( ). To save a page while browsing, select Op tions > Advanced options > Save page . To start a connection to the browser service and to download the latest version of t he page, select Opt ions > Navigation options > Reload . The phone stays online after you reload the page. Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and vide o clips. These items can be provided free, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respec tive applications in your
Web 64 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. phone, for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Gallery . Import ant: Only install app lications from sources that offer adequate protection against harmful software. 1 To download the item, scroll to the link, and press . If the item is pr ovided free, select Accept . Once downloaded, the content is automatically opened in a suitable application. To cancel the download, select Cancel . 2 Select the appropriate option to purchase the item, for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ. 3 Carefully re ad all the info rmation pro vided. If the online content is compa tible, you can use your wallet information to make the purchase. 4 Select Open Wallet . You are prompted for your wallet code. See âÂÂCreate a wallet codeâÂÂ, p. 70. 5 Select the appropriate card category from your wallet. 6 Select Fill in . This uploads the selected wallet informa tion. If the wallet does not contain all information necessary for the purchase, you are requested to enter the remaining details manually. Note: Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringtones and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. End a connection Select Options > Advanced options > Disconnect , or press and hold to quit browsing and to return to the standby mode. Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the phone. Note: A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If yo u have tried to a ccess or have accessed confident ial information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use . The information or services you have accessed is sto red in the cache memory of the phone. To empty the cache, select Options > Navigation op tions > Clear cache . Web settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Default access point âÂÂTo change the default access point, press to open a list of availab le access points. See âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. Show images âÂÂTo sele ct if you want to load images whil e browsing or not. If you select No , to load images later during browsing, select Options > Show images .
Web 65 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Font size âÂÂTo choose the text size. Default encoding âÂÂIf text characters are not shown correctly, you may choose anot her encoding according to language. Automatic bookmarks âÂÂTo disable aut omatic bookmark collecting, select Off . If you want to continue collecting automatic bookmarks but hi de the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . Screen size âÂÂTo select what is shown when you are browsing. Select Select. keys only or Full screen . Search page âÂÂTo define a Web page that is downloaded when you select Navigation options > Open search page in the bookmarks view, or when browsing. Volume âÂÂIf you want the browser to play sounds embedded on Web pages, select a volume level. Rende ring âÂÂIf you want the page layout shown as accurately as possible, select By q uality . If you do not want external cascading style sheets to be downloaded, select By speed . Cookies âÂÂTo enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Glossary: Cookies are a means of content providers to identify users and their preferences for frequently used content. Java/ECM A script âÂÂT o enable or disable the use of scripts. Security warnings âÂÂTo hide or show security notifi cations . Conf. DTMF se nding âÂÂChoose whether you wan t to confirm bef ore the ph one sends DT MF tones du ring a call . See also âÂÂOptions during a callâÂÂ, p. 23. Wallet > On âÂÂTo open the wallet automatically when a compatible browser page is opened. See âÂÂWalletâÂÂ, p. 69.
Office 66 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Office Calculator To add, substract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and percentages, press , and select Office > Calculator . Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculatio ns. To save a number in the memory (indicated by M ), sel ect Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve a number in memory, select Option s > Memory > Recall . To clear a number in memory, select Options > Memory > Clear . Calculate percentages 1 Enter a number for which you wa nt to calculate a percentage. 2 Select , , , or . 3 Enter the percentage. 4 Select . Converter To convert measures such as Length from one unit ( Yar ds ) to another ( Metres ), press , and select Office > Converter . Options in Converter are Select unit / Change currency , Co nversion type , Currency rates , Help , and Exit . Note that Conver ter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. 1 Scroll to the Type field, and press to open a list of measures. Scro ll to the measure you wa nt to use, and select OK . 2 Scroll to the first Unit field, and press . Select the unit from which you want to convert and OK . Scroll to the next Unit field, and select the unit to which you want to convert. 3 Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Press to add a decimal and for the , - (for temperature), and E (exponent) symbols.
Office 67 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Set base currency an d exchange rates Tip! To change the conversion order, enter the value in the second Amount fi eld. The result is shown in the first Amount field. Before you can make currency convers ions, you need to choose a base curre ncy and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base curren cy determines th e conversion rates of the other curre ncies. 1 Select Converter > Options > Curren cy rat es . A list of currencies opens, and you can see the current base currency at the top. 2 To change the base currency , scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base curr. Tip! To rename a currency, go to the currency rates view, scrol l to the cu rrency, a nd select Option s > Rename curr ency . 3 Add exchange rates. Scroll to the currency, and enter a new rate, that is, how many units of the curr ency equal one unit of the base currency you have selected. After you have inserted all the ne cessary exchange rates, you can make currency convers ions. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates because all previously set exchange rates are set to zero. To-do Create a task list Press , and select Office > To-do to write notes and maintain a task list. To add a note, press any key to start to write the task in the Subject field. To set the due date for the task, scroll to the Due date field, and enter a date. To set the pr iority fo r the To-do note, scroll to the Prio rity field, and press to select th e priority. The priority icons are ( High ) and ( Low ). There is no icon for Normal . To mark a task as completed, s croll to it in the To-do list, and select Option s > Mark as done . To restore a task, scroll to it in the To-do list, and select Options > Mark as not done . Notes Press , and select Office > Notes to write notes. You can send notes to other compa t ible devices and save plain text fil es (TXT format) t hat you r eceive to Notes .
Office 68 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Recorder Press , and select Office > Recorder to record telephone conversations and voice memos. If you are recording a telephone c onversa tion, both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording.
My own 69 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. My own Go toâÂÂadd shortcuts Default shortcuts: Opens Calend ar Opens Inbox Opens Notes To store shortcuts ( links to your favour ite images, notes, bookmarks, and so on), press , and select My own > Go to . Shortcuts are added only from the individual applications, for example, Gallery . Not all applic ations have this function. 1 Select an item from an a pplication to which yo u want to add a shortcut. 2 Select Add to 'G o to' . A shortcut in Go to is automatically updated if you move the item to which it is pointing (for example, from one folder to another). To change the identifier in the lower left corner of the shortcut icon, select Options > Shortcut icon . Delete a shortcut Select the shortcut, and press . The default shortcuts Notes , Calendar , and Inbox cannot be deleted. When you remove an a pplication or a docum ent which has a shortcut in Go to , the shortcut icon of the removed item is dimmed in the Go to view. The shortcut can be deleted next time you start Go t o . Wallet Press , and select My own > Wal let . Wallet provides you with a storage area for your personal information, such as cre dit and de bit ca rd numbers, addresses, and other useful data (for example, user names and passwo rds). The information stored in Wa llet can be retrieved while browsing to automatically fil l in online forms on browser pages (for example, when the service asks fo r credit card details). Data in Wall et is encrypted and protected with a wallet code that you define. Wallet automa tically closes af ter 5 minutes. Ente r the wallet code to regain access to the contents. You can change this automatic time-o ut period if required. See âÂÂWallet settingsâÂÂ, p. 71.
My own 70 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Options in the Wallet main view are Open , Settings , Help , and Exit . Create a wallet code Each time you open Wallet , you are prompted for a wallet code. Enter the code that you have created, and select OK . When you open Wall et for the first time, you must create your own wallet code: 1 Enter a code of your choice (4âÂÂ10 alphanumeric characters), and select OK . 2 You are prompted to verify the code. Enter the same code, and select OK . Do not give your wallet code to anyone else. If you enter the wallet code incorrectly on th ree consecutive occasions, Wallet is blocked for 5 minutes. The block time increases if further incorrect wallet c odes are entered. If you forget your wallet code, you mus t reset the code, and you will lose all in fo rmation stored in Wallet . âÂÂReset the wallet and wallet codeâÂÂ, p. 72. Store personal card details 1 Select the Cards category from the main Wallet menu, and press . 2 Select a type of card fr om the list, and pre ss . Payment cards âÂÂCredit and debit cards. Loyalty cards âÂÂMembership and store cards. Online acc. c ards âÂÂPersonal user names a nd passwords to online services. Address cards âÂÂBasic contact details for home or the office. User info cards âÂÂCustomised personal p references for online services. 3 Select Options > New card . A n empty form ope ns. 4 Fill in the fields, and select Done . You can also receive car d information directly to th e phone from a card issu er or service provider (if they offer th is service). You will be notified which category the card belongs to. Save or discard the card. You can view and rename a saved card, but you canno t edit it. You can open, edit, or delete the fields in the card. Any changes will be saved upon exiting. Create personal notes Personal notes are a means of storing sensitive information, for example, a bank account number. You can access the data in a personal note from the browser. You can also send the note as a message. 1 Select the Personal n otes category from th e main Wallet menu, and press . 2 Select Options > New note . An empty note opens.
My own 71 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. 3 Press â to start writing. Press to clear characters. 4 Select Done to save. Create a wallet profile Once you have stored your personal details, you can combine them into a wallet profile. Yo u can use a wallet profile to retrieve wallet da ta from different cards and categories to the browser, for example, when you are filling in a form. 1 Select the Wallet profiles category from the main wallet menu, and press . 2 Select Options > New profile . A new wallet profile form opens. 3 Fill in the fields or select an option from the listed items: Profile name âÂÂChoose and enter a name for the profil e. Payment card âÂÂSelect a card from the list. Loyalty c ard âÂÂSelect a card from the list. Online access card âÂÂSelect a card fr om the list. Shipping add ress âÂÂSelect an address from the list. Billin g address âÂÂBy default, this is the same as the shipping address. If you require a different address, select one from the address card category. User info card âÂÂSelect a card from the list. Receive e-receipt âÂÂSelect a dest ination from the list. Deliver e-receipt âÂÂSelect To phone , To e-mai l , or To pho. & e-mail . RFID sending âÂÂSet to On or Off . Defines whether or not your unique phone identification is sent with the wallet profile. 4 Sele ct Done . Example: By upload ing your pa yment card details you do not need to enter the card number and expiry date each time you need them (depending on the content being browsed). Also, you can retrieve your user name and password stored as an access card when connecting to a mobile service that requires authent icatio n. View ticket details You can receive notification s of tickets purchased online through the browser. Received notifications are stored in the wallet. To view the notifications: 1 Select the Ti ckets category from the main Wallet menu, and press . 2 Sele ct Options > View . None of the fields within the notification can be modified. Wallet settings From th e main Wallet menu, select Opt ions > Settings and the following:
My own 72 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Wallet code âÂÂChange your wallet code. You are prompted to enter the current code, create a new code, and verify the new code. RFID âÂÂSet the phone ID code, type, and sending options. Automatic close âÂÂChang e the au tomatic t ime-out pe riod (1âÂÂ60 minutes). After the time-out period has elapsed, the wallet code must be re-ent ered to gain access to the contents. Reset the wallet and wallet code This operation erases all contents of Wallet . To reset both the contents of Wallet and the wallet code: 1 Enter *#7370925538# in the standby mode. 2 Enter the phone lock c ode, and select OK . See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, p. 91. When opening Wal let again, you must enter a new wallet code. See âÂÂCreate a wallet codeâÂÂ, p. 70.
IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) 73 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) Press , and select Connect. > IM . Instant messaging is a network service which allows you to converse with other people using instant m essages and join discussion forums (IM gr oups) with specific topics. Various service providers mai nta in IM servers that you can log in to o nce y ou have registere d to an I M ser vice. Options in the IM main view are Open , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . Note: Check the availability of chat services, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator and/or service provider. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services . Receive IM settings Tip: To log in automatically when you s tart IM , without having to enter yo ur user ID and pass word eac h time, select Options > Se ttings > Server settings > IM login type > Automatic . You must save the settings to ac cess the service that you want to use. You may receive th e settings in a special text message, a so-called smart message, from the network operator or service provider that offers the I M service. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 48. You can also enter th e settings manually. See âÂÂChat serve r settingsâÂÂ, p. 78. Connect to an IM server 1 Open IM to have your phone connect to the IM server in use. To change the IM server in use and save new IM servers, see âÂÂChat ser ver settingsâÂÂ, 78. 2 Enter your user ID an d pa ssword, and press to log in. You obtain the user ID and password for the IM server from your service provider. You can select Cancel to stay offline; to log in to the IM server later, select Options > Login . You cannot send or receive messages while you are offline. 3 To log out, select Options > Logout . Modify your IM settings Sele ct Options > Sett ings > IM settings : Use screen name (shown only if IM groups are supported by the server)âÂÂTo enter a nickname (up to10 characters), select Yes .
IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) 74 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. IM presence âÂÂTo allow others to see if you are online, select Active for al l . Allow messages from âÂÂTo al low messages from all, select All . Allow invitations from âÂÂTo allow invitations only from your IM contacts, se lect IM contacts only . IM invitations are sent by IM contacts who want you to join their groups. Msg. scrolling speed âÂÂTo select the speed at which new messages are displayed. Sort IM contacts âÂÂTo s ort your IM cont acts Alphabetically or By online status . Availability reloading âÂÂTo choose how to update information about whether your IM contacts are online or offline, select Automati c or Manual . Search for IM groups and users To search for groups, in the IM groups view, selec t Options > Search . You can search by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID). To search for users, in the IM cont acts view, select Options > New IM contact > Search . You ca n search by User's name , User ID , Phone number , and E-mail address . Join and leave an IM group To join an IM group that yo u have sa ved, scroll to the group, and press . To join an IM group not on the list, but for which you know the group ID, select Options > Join new group . Enter the group ID, and press . To leave the IM gr oup, sele ct Option s > Leave IM g roup . Chat Once you have joined an IM group, you can view the messages that are exchanged there, and send your own messages. Options while chatting are Send , Send private msg. , Re ply , Forward , Insert smiley , Send invitati on , Leave IM group , Add to banned list , Group , Record convers. / Stop recording , Help , and Exit . To send a message, wr ite the message in the message editor field, and press . To send a private message to a participant, select Options > Send private msg. , select the recipient, write the message, and press . To reply to a private message sent to you, selec t the message, and select Option s > Reply .
IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) 75 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To invite IM contacts who are online to join the IM group, select Options > Send invitation , select the contacts you want to invite, writ e the invitation message, and press . Record chats Options in the recorded chats view are Open , Delete , Send , Mark/Unmark , Login / Logout , Settings, Help , and Exit . To record to a file the m essag es that ar e exchanged during a conversation or while you are joined in a IM group, select Option s > Record convers. , enter a name f or the conversation file, and press . To stop recording, sel ect Option s > Stop recording . The recorded conversation fi les are automatically saved in the Recorded chats . To view the recorded chats, in the main view, select Recorded chats , select the conversation, and press . View and start conversations Go to the Conversations view to see a list of the individual conversation participants that you have an ongoing conversation with. To view a conversation, scroll to a participant, and press . Options when viewing a conversation are Send , Add to IM contacts , In sert smi ley , Forward , Record convers. / Stop recording , Blocking options , End conversation , Help , and Exit To continue the conversation , write your message, and pres s . To return t o the c onversat ions lis t with out clo sing th e conversation, press Back . To close the conv ersation, select Op tions > End conversation . Ong oing conversations are automatically closed when you exit IM . To start a new conversation, select Optio ns > New conversation : Select recipient âÂÂTo see a list of your chat cont acts that are currently online. Scroll to the contact that you want to start a conversation with, and p ress . Glossary: The user ID is provided by the service provider to those who register to this service. Enter user I D âÂÂTo enter the user ID of the user you want to start a conversation w ith, and press . To save a convers ation participant to your IM contacts, scroll to the participant, and select Options > Add to IM contacts .
IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) 76 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. To send automatic replies to incoming messages, select Options > Se t auto reply on . Enter the text, and press Done . You can still receive messages. To prevent receiving messages from certain participants, select Options > Blocking options , an d select from the following: Add to blocked list âÂÂTo block messages from the currently selected pa rticipant. Add ID to list manually âÂÂTo enter the user ID of the participant. Enter the ID, and press . View blocked list âÂÂTo see the participants whose messages are being blocked. Unblock âÂÂTo select the user that you want to remove from the bl ocke d list . Press . IM contacts Go to the IM con tacts to retrieve chat contac t lists from the server, or to add a new chat contact to a contact list. When you log in to the server, the previously used chat contact list is retrieved from the server automatically. Options in the IM contacts view are Open conversation , Op en , Change contact list , Reload use r availab. , Belongs to groups , New IM contact , Move to other list , Edit , Delete , Switch tracking on , Blocking options , Login / Lo gout, Settin gs, Help , and Exit . To create a new contact, select Options > New IM co ntact > Enter manually . Fill in the Nickname and User ID fields, and select Done . To move a contact from a list on the server to the ret rieved list, select Op tions > New IM contact > Move from other list . To change the chat contact list, select Options > Change contact list . Select from the following options : Open co nversati on âÂÂTo start a new conversation or continue an ongoing conver sation with the contact. Switch tracking on âÂÂTo have the phone notify you every time the chat contact goes online or offline. Belongs to groups âÂÂTo see which groups the chat contact has joined. Reload user availab. âÂÂTo update information about whether the contact is online or offline. The online status is shown by an indicator next to the contact name. This option is not available if you have set the Availability reloading to Automatic in IM settin gs .
IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) 77 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Manage IM groups Options in the IM groups view are Open , Join new group , Create new group , Leave IM group , Group , Search , Logi n / Logout , Settings, Help , and Exit . Go to the IM groups view to see a list of the IM groups that you have either saved or are currently joined to. Scroll to a group, select Options > Group and one of the following: Save âÂÂTo save an unsaved group that you are currently joined to. View participants âÂÂTo see who are currently joined to the grou p. Details âÂÂTo see the group ID, topic, participants, administrators of the group (s hown only if you have the editing rights), the list of bloc ked participants (shown only if you have the editing rights), and whether private conversations are allowed in the group. Settings âÂÂTo view and edit the ch at group settings. See âÂÂCreate a new IM groupâÂÂ, p 77. Administrate an IM group Create a new IM group Sele ct IM gr oups > Opti ons > Create ne w group . Enter the settings for the group. You can edit the settings f o r an IM group if you have administrator rights to the gr oup. The user who creates a group is automatically given administrator rights to it. Group name , Group topic , and We lcome note âÂÂTo add details that the participants see when they join the group. Group size âÂÂTo define the maximum number of members allowed to join the group. Allow search âÂÂTo define if others ca n find the chat group by sea rchin g. Editing rights âÂÂTo define the chat group participants to whom you want to give rights to invite contac ts to join the IM group and edit the group settings. Group members âÂÂSee âÂÂAdd and remove group membersâÂÂ, p. 78. Banned list âÂÂEnter the participants that are not allowed to join the IM group. Allow private msgs. âÂÂTo allow messaging between selected participants only.
IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) 78 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Group ID âÂÂThe group ID is created automatically and cannot be changed. Add and remove group members To add members to a group, selec t IM groups , scroll to an IM group, and select Options > Group > Settings > Group me mbers > Selected only or All . To remove a member from the IM group, scroll to the member, and select Op tions > Re move . To remove all members, select Options > Remove all . Chat server settings Select Options > Settings > Server settin gs . You may receive the settings in a special text message from the network operator or service prov ider that offers the chat service. You obtain the user ID and password from your service provider when you re gister to the service. If you do not know your user ID or password, contact your service provider. To change the IM server to which you wish to connect, select Default s erver . To add a new server to your list of IM servers, select Servers > Options > New server . Enter the following settings: Server name âÂÂEnter the name for the chat server. Access point in use âÂÂSelect the access point you want to use for the server. Web address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the I M server. User ID âÂÂEnter your user ID. Password âÂÂEnter your login password.
Connectivity 79 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Connectivity Bluetooth connection Bluetooth technology enable s wireless connections to send images, video cl ips, music an d sound clip s, and notes, or to connect wirelessly to compati ble devices with Bluetooth technology such as computers. Sin ce devices with Bluetooth technology communica te using ra dio waves, your phone and the other d evice do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 10 metres of each other, although the connection can be subject to inte rference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 1.2 supporting the following profile s: Generic Ac cess Profile, Serial Port Profile, Bluetooth Printing Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, Headse t Profile, Handsfree Profile, Generic Object Exchange Profile , Object Push Profile, File Transfer Pr ofile, and Basi c Imaging Profile. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use No kia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their co mpatibility wi th this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Chec k with your local authorities or service provider. Features that use Bluetooth technology, or allow such features to run in the background while using other features, increase the dema nd on battery power and reduces the battery l ife. Bluetooth connection settings Press , and select Connec t. > Bluetooth . Enter the following: Bluetooth âÂÂSet to On or Off . My phone's visibility > Shown to all âÂÂYour phone can be found by other devices with Bluetooth technology or Hidden âÂÂYour phone cannot be found by other devices. My phone's name âÂÂDef ine a name for your phone. After you have set a Bluetooth conn ection and changed My phone's visibility to Shown to all , your phone and this name can be seen by other users with devices using Bluetooth technology.
Connectivity 80 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Send data using a Bluetooth connection There can be only one active Bluetooth connection at a time. 1 Open an application where th e item you wish to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery . 2 Select the item, for example, an image, and select Options > Se nd > Via Bluetooth . Tip! When s earchin g for devices, some devi ces may show only the unique addresses (device addresses). To find the unique address of your phone, enter the code * #2820# in the standby mode. The phone starts to search for devic es within ran ge. Devices with Bluetooth technology that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. You can see a device icon, the name of the device, the device type, or a short name. Tip! If y ou have searched for d evices earlier, a list of the devices that were found previously is shown first. To start a new sear ch, select More devices . If you switch off the phone, the list is cleared. To interrupt the search, press Stop . The device list freezes, and you ca n start to form a connection to one of the devices already found. 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds and you ar e asked to enter a passcode. Create your own passcode (1âÂÂ16 digits), and agree with the owner of the othe r device to use the same code. The passcode is used only once. Tip! To send text using a Bluetooth connection (instead of text messages), go to Notes , write the text, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices view. Glossary: Pairing means authentica tion. The users of the devic es with Blue tooth te ch nology should agree what the passcode is and use th e same passcode for both devic es in o rder t o pai r them . Devi ces tha t do no t have a user interface ha ve a factory-set passcode. When the connection has been established, th e note Sending data is shown. The Drafts folder in Messaging does not store messages sent using a Bluetooth connection. Icons for different device s: Computer Phone Audio or video
Connectivity 81 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Headset Other Check th e status of the Bluetoo th connection ⢠When is shown in the standby mode, a Bluetooth connection is active. ⢠When is blinking, your phone is trying to connect to the other device. ⢠When is shown continuously, the Bluetooth connection is active. Pair devices Tip! To define a short na me (nickname or alias), scroll to the device, and select Op tions > Assign short name in the paired devices view. This name helps you t o recognise a certain device duri ng device search or when a device requests a connection. Paired devices are easier to recognise; they are indicated by in the device search. In the Bluetooth main view, press to open the paired devices view ( ). To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . The phone starts a device se arch. Select the device. Exchange passcodes. See step 4 in âÂÂSend data using a Bluetooth connectionâÂÂ, p. 80. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings , select Options > Delete all . Tip! If yo u are currently connected to a device and delete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately, but the connection remains active. To set a device to be authorised or unauthorised, scroll to a device, and select from the following options: Set as authorised âÂÂConnections between your phone and this device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or author isation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compat ible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorised devices in the paired devices view. Set as unau thorised âÂÂConnection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. Receive data using a Bluetooth connection When you receive data u sin g a Bluetooth connection, a tone sounds, and you are a sked if you want to accept the message. If you acce pt, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inb ox folder in Messaging . Messages
Connectivity 82 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. received using a Bluetooth co nnection are indicated b y . See âÂÂInboxâÂÂreceive messagesâÂÂ, p. 48. Switch off Bluetooth connectivity To switch off Bluetooth connectivity , select Bluetooth > Off . PC connections You can use your phone with a variety of PC connectivity and data communications app lications, for example, the MMC card reader supplied in the sales package. With Nokia PC Suite you can, for example, synchronise contacts, calendar, and to-do notes between your phone and a compatible PC. For further information on how to install Nokia PC Suite (compatible with Windows 2000 and Windows XP), see the User Guide for Nokia PC Suite and the Nokia PC Suite help in th e âÂÂInstallâ section on th e CD-ROM. CD-ROM The CD-ROM should launch aft er you have inserted it into the CD-ROM drive of a compatible PC. If not, proceed as follows: Open Windows Explorer, right-click the CD-ROM drive where you inserted the CD-ROM, and select Autoplay. Your phone as a modem You can use your phone a s a modem to send and receive e-mail, or to connect to the Internet with a compatible PC by using a Bluetooth connectio n o r a data cable. Detailed installation instruct ions can be found in the User Guide for Nokia PC Suite in Modem options on the CD-ROM. Connection manager You may have multiple data connections active at the same time when you are using your phone in GSM networks. Press , and select Connect. > Conn. mgr. to view the status of multiple data connections, view details on the amount of data sent and received, and end connections. When you open Conn. mgr. , you can see th e following: ⢠Open data connections: da ta calls ( ) and packet data connections ( ) ⢠The statu s of each co nnection ⢠The amount of data uploaded and downloaded for each connection (shown for packet data connections only) ⢠The duration of each conne ction (shown for dat a calls only)
Connectivity 83 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending o n network features, roundi ng off fo r billing, and so forth. To end a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Option s > Disconnect . To close all currently open connections, select Options > Disconnect all . View data connection details Options in Conn. mgr. main view when there are one or more connections are Details , Disconnect , Disconnect all , Help , and Exit . To view the details of a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Options > Details . Name âÂÂThe name of the Internet access point (IAP) in use, or the modem connection name if the connection is a dial- up connection. Bearer âÂÂThe type of data connection: Data call , High sp. GSM , or Packet d ata . Status âÂÂThe current status of the conn ection: Connecting , Conn.(inact.) , Conn.(active) , On hold , Disconnctng. , or Disconnected . Received âÂÂThe amount of data, in bytes, received to the phone. Sent âÂÂThe amount of data, in by tes, sent from the phone. Duration âÂÂThe length of time that the connection has been open . Speed âÂÂThe current speed of bo th sending and receiving data in kilobytes per second. Name âÂÂAccess point name used. Dial-up âÂÂThe dial-up number used. Shared (not shown if the conn ection is not shared)âÂÂThe number of applications using the same connection. Remote synchronisation Press , and select Connec t. > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronise your calendar and contac ts with various calendar and address book applications on a compatible computer or on the Internet. The synchronisation applicatio n uses SyncML technology for synchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the supplier of the calendar or address book application you want to synchronise your phone data with . You may receive syncronisation settings in a special text message. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 48.
Connectivity 84 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Create a new synchronisation profile Options in the Sync main view are Synchronise , New sync pr ofile , Edit sync profile , Dele te , View log , Set as default , Help , and Exit . 1 If no profiles have been de fined, the phone asks if you want to create a new profile. Select Yes . To create a new profile in addition to existing ones, select Options > New sync profile . Choose whether you want to use the default setting values or copy the values from an existing profile to be used as the basis for the new profile. 2 Define the following: Sync profile name âÂÂWrite a desc riptive name for the profile. Data bearer âÂÂSelect the connection type: Web , Bluetooth , or Data cable . Access point âÂÂSelect an access poi nt to use for the data connection. Host address âÂÂContact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. Port âÂÂContact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. User name âÂÂYour use r ID for the syn chronis ation server. Contact your serv ice provider or system administrator for your correct ID. Password âÂÂWrite your password. Contact your service provider or system administ r ator for the correct value. Allow sync requests âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to allow the server to start a synchronisation. Auto-a ccept sy nc reqs. âÂÂSelect No if you want the phone to ask you before a sy nchronisation initialised by the server is started. Network authen tic. (shown only if Data b earer is set to Web )âÂÂSelect Yes to enter a network user name and password. Press to view the user name and password fields. 3 Press to select: Calendar , Contacts , or Notes . ⢠Select Yes if you want to synchronise the selected database. ⢠In Remo te datab ase , select the synchronisation type: Normal (two-way synchronisation), To serve r only , or To phone only . ⢠Enter a correct path to the remote calendar, address book, or notes database on the server. 4 Press Back to save the settings and return to the main view. Synchronise data In the Sync main view, you can see the different synchronisat ion profiles and the kind of data to be synchronised. 1 Select a synchronisation profile and Options > Synchronise . The status of the synchronisatio n is shown at the bottom of the screen.
Connectivity 85 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, pre ss Cancel . 2 You are notified when th e sy nchronisation is complete. After synchronisation is complete, select Options > View log to open a log file showing the synchronisation status ( Complete or Incomplete ) and how many calendar or contact entries have been added, updated, deleted, or discarded (not sy nchronised) in the phone or on the server. Device manager Press , and select Connect . > Dev. mgr. . You may receive server profiles and di fferent configuration settings from your network operator, service pro vider, or company information management depa rtment. These configuration settings may include access point s ettings for data connections and other settings used b y different applications in your phone. To connect to a server and re ceive configuration settings for your phone, select Options > Start configuration . To allow or deny receiving of configuration settings from a service provider, select Enable config. or Disable confi g. . Server profile settings Contact your service provider for the correct s ettings. Server name âÂÂEnter a name for the configuration server. Server ID âÂÂEnter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. Server password âÂÂEnter a password to identify your phone to the server. Session mode â Select Bluetoot h or Web . Access point âÂÂSelect an access point to be used when connecting to the server. Host address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the server. Port âÂÂEnter the port number of the server. User name and Password âÂÂEnter your user name and password. Allow con figuration âÂÂTo receiv e configuration settings from the server, select Yes . Auto-accept all reqs. âÂÂIf you want the phone to ask for confirmation before accepting a conf iguration from the server, select No .
Tools 86 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools Settings To change settings, pr ess , and select Tools > Settings . Scroll to a setting group, and press to open it. Scroll to a setting you want to change, and press . Phone settings General Phone language âÂÂChanging the language of th e display texts in your phone also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automat ic selects the language according to the information on your SI M card. After you change the display text language, the phone restarts. Changing the settings for Phone language or Writin g language affects every application in your phone, and the change remains effective until you change these settings again. Writing language âÂÂChanging the language affects the characters an d special characters available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Dictionary âÂÂYou can set the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the phone. Th e predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. Welcome note or logo âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time y ou switch on the phone. Select Off to disable the Welcome note or logo , Text to write a welcome note (up to 50 letters), or Image to select a photo or picture from Gallery . Orig. phon e settin gs âÂÂYou can res et some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, âÂÂPhone and SIMâÂÂ, p. 92. After resetting, the phone may take a longer time to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Standby mode Active standby âÂÂUse shortcuts to applicatio ns in the standby mode. See âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 15 Left selection k ey âÂÂTo assign a shortc ut to the left selection key ( ) in the standby mode, select an application from the list.
Tools 87 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Right selection key âÂÂTo assign a shortc ut to the right selection key ( ) in the standby mode, select an application from the list. You can also as sign keypad shortcu ts for the different presses of the scroll key, by selecting an application from the list. The scroll key shortc uts are not available if the active standby is o n. Operator logo âÂÂThis setting is visib le only if you have received and saved an operator logo. You can c hoose if you want the operator logo to show or not. Display Brightness âÂÂYou c an change the brightness of the display to lighter or darker. The brighness of the display is automatically adjusted according to the environment. Screen saver timeout âÂÂThe screen saver is activa ted when the timeout period is over. Light time-out âÂÂSelect a timeout after which the backlight is switched off. Call settings Send my caller ID (network service)â You ca n set you r phone number to be displaye d to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your network operator or service provider when you make a subscription ( Set by network ). Call waiting (network service)âÂÂIf you ha ve activated call waiting, the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a ca ll in progress. Select Activat e to request the network to ac tivate call waiting, Cancel to request the network to deac tivate call waiting, or Check status to check if the func tion is active or not. Reject call with SMS âÂÂSelect Yes to s end a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the call. See âÂÂAnswer or reject a callâÂÂ, p. 22. Message te xt âÂÂWrite a te xt to be sent in a text message when you reject a call. Tip! To change the settings for call divert ing, press , and select Tools > Settings > Call divert . See âÂÂCall divertingâÂÂ, p. 94. Automatic redi al âÂÂSelect On , and your phone makes a maximum of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To st op automatic redialling pres s .
Tools 88 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Summary after call âÂÂActivate this sett ing if you want the phone to briefly display the approximate duration of the last call. Speed dialling âÂÂSelect On , and the numbers assigned to the speed dialling keys ( - ) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See also âÂÂSpeed dial a phone numberâÂÂ, p. 21. Anykey ans wer âÂÂSelect On , and you ca n answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key, except , , , and . Line in us e (network servic e)âÂÂThis sett ing is shown only if the SIM card supports two su bscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending t ext messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespecti ve of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Tip! To switch between the phone lines, press and hold in the standby mode. Line change (network service)âÂÂTo prevent line selection, select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Connection settings Data connections and access points Your phone supports packet data connections ( ), such as GPRS in the GSM network. Glossary: General packet radio service (GPRS) uses packet data technology wher e information is sent in short packets of data ov er the mobile network. To establish a data connection, an ac cess point is required. You can define diffe rent kinds of access points, such as: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Access point fo r the Web applicati on to view WML or XHTML page s ⢠Internet ac cess point ( IAP) to send and receive e-mail Check the kind of access poin t you need with your service provider for the service you wi sh to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your network operator or service provider. Packet data connections in GSM netwo rks When you use your phone in GSM networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, access points can share a data connection, and dat a connections remain
Tools 89 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. active during voice ca lls. To check the active data connections, see âÂÂConnection managerâÂÂ, p. 82. The following indicators may be d isplayed below the signal indicator, dependin g on which network you use: GSM network, packet data is available in the network. GSM network, packet data co nnection is ac tive, data is being transferred. GSM network, multiple packet data connections are active. GSM network, packet data co nnection is on hold. (This can happen during a voice call, for example.) Receive access point settings You may receive access point settings in a text message from a service provider, or you may hav e preset access point settings in your phone. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 48. To create a ne w access point, select Tools > Settings > Connec tion > Access points . An access point may be protected ( ) by your netwo rk operator or service provider. Protected access points cannot be edited or deleted. Access points Options in the Access points list are Edit , New access point , Delete , Help , and Exit . Follow the instructions given to you by your service provi der . Connection name âÂÂGive a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer âÂÂDepending on what data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in al l fields marked with Must be de fined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider. Options when editing access point settings are Change , Advanced settings , Help , and Exit . To be able to use a data co nnection, the network service provider must sup port this feature, and if necessary , activate it for your SIM card. Access point name (for packet data only)âÂÂThe access point name is needed to establ ish a connection to the packet data network. You obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider. Tip! See also âÂÂReceive MMS and e-mail settingsâÂÂ, p. 47, âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54, and âÂÂAccess the WebâÂÂ, p. 60. User name âÂÂThe user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the se rvice provider. The user name is often case-sensitive.
Tools 90 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter a new password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the phone, choose Yes . Password âÂÂA password may be needed to make a da ta connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. The password is often ca se-sensit ive. Authentication âÂÂSelect Normal or Secure . Homepage âÂÂDepending on what you are setting up, write the Web address or the a ddress of the multimedia messaging centre. Select Options > Advanced sett ings to change the following setting s: Network type âÂÂSelect the Internet protocol type to use: IPv4 settings or IPv6 setting s . Phone IP address âÂÂEnter the IP address of your phone. Name servers âÂÂIn Primary nam e server: , enter the IP address of the prim ary DNS server. In Second. name server: , enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your Internet serv ice provider to ob tain these addresses. Glossary: The domain name service (DNS) is an Internet service that transl ates domain names such as www.nokia.com into IP addres ses like 192.100.124.195. Proxy serv. addr ess âÂÂDefine the address for the proxy server. Proxy por t number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data conn. âÂÂIf you select When av ailable and you are in a network that suppor ts packet data, the phone registers to the packet data network. Also, starting an active packet data connection is quicker (for example, to send and receive e-mail). If you select When need ed , the phone uses a packet data connec tion only if you start an application or action that needs it. If there is no packet data coverage and you select When available , the phone periodically tries to es tablis h a packet data connection. Access point âÂÂThe access point name is needed to use your phone as a packet data modem to your computer. Configurations You may receive trusted server settings fro m your network operator or service provider in a configurat ion message, or the settings may be stored on your SIM or USIM card. Yo u can save these settings to your phone, view, or delete them in Configurations .
Tools 91 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Date and time See âÂÂClock settingsâÂÂ, p. 16. See also the language settings in âÂÂGeneralâÂÂ, p. 86. Security Phone and SIM PIN code reque st âÂÂWhen active, the code is requested each time the phone is switched on. Deactivating the personal identification number (PIN) code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. S ee âÂÂGlossary of PIN and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 92. PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock c ode âÂÂYou can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . See âÂÂGlossary of PIN and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 92. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. Autolock peri od âÂÂYou can set an autolock period, a time- out after which the phone auto matically lock s and can be used only if the correct lo ck code is entered. Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select None to turn off the autolock period. To unlock the phone, enter the lock code. Note: When the phone is locked, calls in offline profile to certain emer gency numbers programmed into your phone are still possible. Tip! To lock the phone manu ally, press . A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone . Lock if SIM changed âÂÂYou can set the phone to ask for the lock code when an unknow n SIM card is inserted into your phone. The phone mainta ins a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Fixed dialli ng âÂÂYou can restri ct calls and text messages from your phone to selected phone numbers, if supported by your SIM card. You need the PIN2 code for this function. To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, press , and select Tools > Settings > Securi ty > Phone and SIM > Fixed dialling . To add new numbers to the fixe d dialling list, select Options > New contact or Add from Contacts . When you use Fixed dialli ng , packet data connections are not possible, except when se nding text messages over a packet data connection. In this case, the
Tools 92 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. message centre number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialling list. Options in the Fixe d dialling view are Open , Call, Activ. fixed dialling / Deact. fixed dialling , New contact , Edit , Delete , Add to Contacts , Add f rom C onta cts , Find , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . Note: When security fea tures that restrict calls are in use (such as Call barring , Closed user group , and Fixed dialling ) calls still may be poss ible to the official emergency numbers progra mmed into your phone. Closed user group (network service)âÂÂYou can specif y a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. Confirm SI M services (network se rvice) âÂÂYou can set the phone to display confirmati on messag es when you are using a SIM card service. Glossary of PIN and lock codes Personal identific ation number (PIN) codeâÂÂThis co de protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supp lied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrec t PIN code entries, the PIN code is blocked, and you need to unblock it before y ou can use the SIM card again. See the infor mation about the PUK code in this section. UPIN codeâÂÂThis code may b e supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. The UPIN code protects the USIM card against unauthor ised use. PIN2 codeâÂÂThis code (4 t o 8 digits) is suppli ed with some SIM cards, and is required to access some f unctions in y our phone. Lock codeâÂÂThis code (5 digits) can be used to lock the phone to avoid unauthorised us e. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorised use of your phone, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your phone. Personal unblocking key (PUK) code and PUK2 codeâÂÂThese codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact t he operator whose SIM card is in your phone. UPUK codeâÂÂThis code (8 digits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the operat or whose USIM card is in your phone. Wallet codeâÂÂThis code is required to use the wallet services. See âÂÂWalletâÂÂ, p. 69.
Tools 93 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Certificate management Digital certificates do not guar antee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certifica te management main view, you can see a list of authority ce rtificates th at are stored i n your phone. Press to see a list of personal cert ificates, if available. Options in the certificat e management main view are Certificate d etails , Delete, Trust se ttings, Mark/Unmark , Help , an d Exit . Glossary: Digital certificates ar e used to verify th e origin of the XHTML or WML pages and i nstalled software. However, they can only be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferring co nfidential information. They should also be used if yo u want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious so ftware and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing software. Important: Even if th e use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably s maller, they must be used correctly in order to benef it from increas ed security. The existence of a certificate do es not offer any protection by itself; the certificate mana ger must contain correct, authentic, or trusted c ertificates for increas ed security to be available. Certificates ha ve a restr icted lifetime. If Expired certifi cate or Certificate n ot valid yet is shown even if the certificate shou ld be valid, check that the current date and time in your phone are correct. View certific ate details âÂÂcheck auth enticit y You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the pe riod of validity of a server certificate have be en checked. You are notified on the phone display if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your phone. To check certificate details, scro ll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate detai ls . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certifi cate is checked, and one of the following notes may be display ed: ⢠Certificate not trusted âÂÂY ou have not set any applica tion to use the cert if icate. See âÂÂChange the trust settingsâÂÂ, p. 94 . ⢠Expired certific ate âÂÂThe period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid yet âÂÂThe period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer.
Tools 94 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Change the t rust settin gs Before changing any certificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust th e owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the lis ted owner. Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Options > Trust setting s . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: ⢠Symbian installation : Yes âÂÂThe cert ificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify servers. ⢠App. installation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java application. Select Options > Edit trust setting to change the value. Call diverting Call divert allows you to divert your incoming calls to your voice mailbox or anothe r phone number. For details, contact your service provid er. 1 Press , and selec t Tools > Settings > Call divert . 2 Select the desired divert option. To divert voice calls when your numbe r is busy or when you reject inncoming calls, select If busy . 3 Set the divert option on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is activated ( Check status ). Several divert opt ions can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. Call barring (network service) Call barring allows you to restrict the calls that you make or receive with the phone. To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whethe r the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Call barring and Call divert cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls still may be possible to certain official emer gency numbers.
Tools 95 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Network Operator selecti on âÂÂSelect Automatic to set the phone to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list of networks . If the conn ection to the manually selected network is lost, the phone soun ds a n error tone and asks you to reselect a network. Th e selected network must have a roaming agreeme nt with your home network, that is, the operator whose SIM card is in your phone. Glossary: A r oaming agreement is an agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Cell info displ ay âÂÂSelect On to set the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellular network ba sed on microc ellul ar network (MCN) technolog y and to activate cell info reception . Enhancement settings Indicators shown in the standby mode: A headset, music stand, or Bluetooth wireless technology device is connected. A loopset is connected. A car ki t is con nected. The headset is unavailable, or a Bluetooth connection to a headset is lost. Sele ct Headset , Carkit , Bluetooth handsfree , or Loopset and the following options are available: Default profile âÂÂTo set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain enhancement to your phone. See âÂÂSet tonesâÂÂ, p. 12. Automatic ans wer âÂÂTo set the phone to answer an incoming call automatically afte r 5 seco nds. If the Ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer is disab led . Voice commands You can use voice commands to control your phon e. You record voice commands in the same way as voice tags. See âÂÂAdd a voice tagâÂÂ, p. 28. Press , and select Tools > Voice com. Add a voice command to an application You can have only one voice command per application.
Tools 96 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1 Select the application to which you want to add a voice command. To add a new application to the list, select Option s > New application . 2 Select Options > Add voice command . See âÂÂAdd a voice tagâÂÂ, p. 28. Application manager Press , and select Tool s > Manager . You can install two types of applications and software to your phone: ⢠J2ME⢠applications based on Java⢠technology with the extension JAD or JAR ( ). Do not d ownload PersonalJava⢠applications to your phone, as they cannot be insta lled. Example: If you have received the installation file as an e-mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e-mail, open the attachments view, scro ll to the installation file, and press to start installation. ⢠Other applications and so ftware suitable for the Symbian operating system ( ). The installation files have the SIS extension. Only install software specifically desig ned for your Nokia 6681 device. Install ation file s may be tr an sferred to your phone from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using a Bluetooth connection. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia PC Suite to install an application to your phone or a memory card. I f you use Microsoft Windows Explorer to tr ansfer a file, save the file to a memory card (local disk). Install applications and software Application icons are as follows: SIS application Java application Application is not fully installed. Application is installed on the memory card. Import ant: Only install applications from so urces that offer adequate protection against harmful software. Before installation, do the following: To view the applicatio n type, version number, and t he supplier or manufacturer of the application, selec t Options > View detail s . To display the security certificate details of the application, select Options > View certificate . See âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 93.
Tools 97 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. If y ou in st al l a f il e th at co nt ai ns an u pd at e o r re pa ir to an existing application, you can only rest ore the original application if you have the origin al installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the appl ication, and install the application again from the or iginal installation file or the backup copy. Tip! You can also use Nokia Application Installer available in Nokia PC Suite to install applications. See the CD-ROM supplied with the phone. The JAR file is required for inst alling Java applications. If it is missing, the phone may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the JAR file, you may ne ed to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. 1 Open Manager , and scroll to an installation file. Alternatively, search the phone memory or the memory card, select the application, and press to start the installation. 2 Select Options > Install . Tip! While browsing, yo u can download an installation file and inst all it without cl osing the connectio n. During instal lation, the phone shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the phone displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of the origin and contents of the application. Options in the Manager main view are Install , App. downloads , Vi ew details , Go to web ad dress , View certificate , Se nd , Remove , View log , Send log , Update , Settings , Help , and Exit . To start an installed applicatio n, scrol l to it, and press . To start a network connection and to view extra information about the application, scroll to it, and select Options > Go to web address , if available. To see what software packag es have been installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . To send your installation log to a help desk so that they can see what has been installed or removed, select Options > Send log > Via te xt message , Via m ultim edia , Via Bluetooth , or Via e-mail (available only if the correct e-mail settings are in place). Remove applications and software Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Remove . Pres s Yes to confirm. If you remove softwa re, you ca n only reinstall it if you have the original software package or a full backup of the
Tools 98 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. removed soft ware pack age. If you remove a sof tware package, you may no longer be able to open doc uments created with that software. Note: If another software packag e depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may st op working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Application settings Software installation âÂÂSelect the kind of software you want installed: On , Si gned only , or Off . Online ce rtif. check âÂÂSelect to check the online certificates before installing an application. Default web address âÂÂSet the default ad dress used when checking online certifica tes. Some Java applications ma y require a phone call, a message to be sent, or a n etwork connection to a specific access point for downloading extra data or components. In the Manager main view, scroll to an application, and select Options > Suite sett ings to change setti ngs related to that specific application. Activation keysâÂÂhandle copyright-protected files Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Press , and select Tools > Activation keys to v iew the digital rights activation keys stored in your phone. ⢠Valid keys ( ) are connected to one or more media files. ⢠With expired keys ( ), you have no time to use the media file, or the time period for using the file is exceeded. To view the Expired acti vation keys, press . ⢠To buy more usage time or extend the usage period for a media file, select an ac tivation key, and Options > Activate con tent . Activation keys cannot be updated if Web service message receptio n is disabled. See âÂÂWeb service messagesâÂÂ, p. 56. ⢠To view which keys are not in use at the moment ( Not used ), press twice. Unused activation keys have no media files connected to them saved in the phone. ⢠To view detailed information such a s the validity status and ability to se nd the file, select an activation key, and press .
Troubleshooting 99 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Troubleshooting Q&A Bluetooth connectivity Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device? A: Check that both devices have activated Bluetoot h connectivity. Check that the distance betw een the two devices is not over 10 metres and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Check that the other device is not in hidden mode. Check that both devices are compatible. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If another device is connected to your phone , you can either end the connection using the ot her device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Select Connect. > Bluetooth > Off . Multimedia messaging Q: What should I do when th e phone cannot receive a multimedia message be cause memory is full? A: The amount of memory needed is indicated in the error message: Not enough memory to retrieve message. Del ete some data first. To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the differe nt data groups consume, select Tools > File manager > Options > Memory details . Q: The note Ret rieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The phone is trying to retrieve a multimedi a message from the multimedia messaging ce ntre. Check that the settings for multimedia mes saging are defined correctly and that ther e are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses . Select Mess aging > Options > Settings > Multimed ia message . Q: How can I end the data conne ction when the phone starts a data connection again and again ? A: To stop the phone from making a data connection, select Messaging and one of the following : On receiving msg. > Defer retr ieval âÂÂTo have the multimedia messaging centre save the message to be retrieved later, for example, after you have checked the settings . After this change , th e phone still needs to send information note s to the network. To retri eve the messa ge now, select Retr. immediately . On receiving msg . > Reject message âÂÂTo reject all incoming multimedia messages. A fter th is change, the phone needs to send information not es to the network, and the multimedia messaging cent re deletes multi media messages that are waiting to be sent to you. Multimedia r eception > Off âÂÂTo ignore all incoming multimedia messages. After th is change, the phone does
Troubleshooting 100 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. not make any network connections relat ed to multimedia messaging. Messaging Q: Why canâ t I select a conta ct? A: The contact card does not have a phone number or an e-mail address. Add the missing information to the contact card in Contacts . Camera Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Check to see if the came ra len s protection window is clean. Calendar Q: Why are the week numbers missing? A: If you have changed the ca lend ar settings so that the week starts on a day other than Monday, the week numbers will not be shown. Browser services Q: What do I do if the following message is displayed: No valid access point define d. Define one in W eb settings. ? A: Insert the correct brow ser se ttings. Contact yo ur service provider for instructions. Log Q: Why does the log appear empty? A: You may have activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filt er ha ve been logged. To see all events, select Connect. > Log > Opt ions > Filter > All commun icati on . Q: How do I delete my log information? A: Select Connect. > Log > Opti ons > Clear log or go to Setti ngs > Log duratio n > No log . These will erase the log contents, recent calls register, and message delivery reports permanently. PC connectivity Q: Why do I have problems in conn ecting the phone to my PC? A: Make sure that Nokia PC Suit e is installed and running on your PC. See the Us er Guide for Nokia PC Suite on the CD-ROM. For further information on how to use Nokia PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia PC Suite or visit the support pages at www.nokia.com . Acce ss codes Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your phone dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, cont act your network service prov ider. For information about passwo rds, contact your access point provider, for examp le, a commercial Inte rnet service provider (ISP), service provider, or network operator. Application not responding Q: How do I close an application that is not responding?
Troubleshooting 101 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. A: Open the application swit ch ing window b y pressing and holding . Then scroll to the app lication, and press to close the application. Phone display Q: Why do missing , discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I turn on my phone? A: This is a characte ristic of this type of dis play. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Memory low Q: What can I do if my phon e memory is low? A: You can delet e the following ite ms regularly to avoid memory getting low: Messages from Inbox , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messaging Retrieved e-mail messages from the phone memory Saved browser pages Images and photos in Gal lery To delete contact information, calendar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, or any other data, go to the respective applicat ion to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and one of the follow ing notes are shown : Not enough memory to pe rform operation. Delet e some data first. or Memory low. Delete some data. , try deleting items one by one (sta rting from the smallest item). Q: How can I save my data before deleting it? A: Save your data using one of the followi ng methods: Use Nokia PC Suite to make a back up copy of all data to a compatible computer. Send images to your e-mail address, and then save the images to your computer. Send data using a Bluetooth connection to a compatible device. Store data on a compatible memory card.
Battery information 102 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is pow ered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new batt ery is achieved only after tw o or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeabl y shorter than no rmal , buy a new battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and re charge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Unplug the charger from the elec trical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger. Overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unuse d, a fully charged battery will lo se its charge over t ime. Temperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental sh ort-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the batte ry. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditio ns, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may no t work te mporarily, even w hen the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is partic ularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire! Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possib le. Do not dispose as household waste.
Care and maintenance 103 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treate d with ca re. The sugges tions below will help you protect your warra nty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity and all types of liquids or moist ure can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the batte ry and allow t he device to dry completel y before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving p arts an d electr onic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of ele ctronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in co ld areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and dama ge electronic ci rcuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt t o open the device other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shak e the device . Rough handling can break in ternal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergent s to clean the device. ⢠Do not paint the device . Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper ope ration. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses (such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses). ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorised ante nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. All of the above suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhanc ement. If any device is not working properly, take i t to the nearest authorized service facility for service.
Additional safety information 104 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Additional safety information Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may ca use interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. To maintain compliance with radio frequency exposure guidelines only use enhancements approved by Noki a for use with this device. When the device is on and be ing worn o n the body, always use an approved hold er or carrying case . Medical devices Operation of any radio t ransmitting equipment, includi ng wireless phones, may inte rfere with the functionality of inadequately protect ed medical devices. Consult a physician or the manu facturer of the me dical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any reg ulations poste d in these areas instruct you to do so. Ho spitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensi tive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 6 in. (15.3 cm ) be maint ained between a wireless phone and a pacema ker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. T hese recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should: ⢠always keep the device more than 6 in. (15.3 cm) from t heir pacema ker when th e devi ce is switched on; ⢠not carry the device in a breast pocket; and ⢠hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for interference. If you have any reason to susp ect that interference is taking place, switch off your device immediately. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere wit h some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded elect ronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (ant ilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added.
Additional safety information 105 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or servi ce may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartmen t as the device , its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equippe d with an air bag, remember t hat air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless eq uipme nt in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deploy ment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly insta lled and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in ai rcraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, di srupt the wi reless telephone netw ork, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environm ents Switch off your device when in any ar ea with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where yo u would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engin e. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire result ing in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points s uch as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include b elow deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or part icles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate usi ng radio signals, w ireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essent ial communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the device is not on, swit ch it on. Chec k for adequate signal stren gth. Some networks may require that a valid SIM or USIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3 Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4 Press the key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information.
Additional safety information 106 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of commu nication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. WARNING! In offline profile you cannot make calls, except calls to certain emergency num bers, or use features that require network coverage. Certification information (SAR) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio tr ansmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIR P). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general popula tion. The guidelines were developed by independ ent scie ntific organisations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scient ific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all person s, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices e mploys a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit state d in the international guidel ines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducte d using standard operating positions with t he device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all test ed frequency bands. Although the SAR is de termined at the hi ghest certified power level, the actual SAR of the d evice while operating can be well belo w the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. The highest SAR value fo r this device when tes ted for use at the ear is 0.79 W/kg. This device meets RF exposure gu idelines when use d either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for bo dy-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should pos itio n the product at least 1.5 cm away from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, t his device requires a quality connection to the network. In s ome cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmis sion is completed. * The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorpor ate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www.nokia.com .
Index 107 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Index A access points 88 settings 89 activation keys 98 alarms alarm clock 16 calendar alarms 58 applications, Java 96 B Bluetooth connecting two device s, pairing 80 connection requests 80 connection status indicators 81 device address 80 device icons 80 factory set passcode 80 headset 95 pairing requests 80 pairing, glossary explanation 80 passcode, glossary explanation 80 switching off 82 bookmark, glossary explanation 61 brightness display 87 setting in camera 31 , 34 C cache clearing 64 calendar alarm 58 stopping a calendar alarm 58 synchronising PC Suite 59 call register See log calls dialled numbers 23 duration 23 international 21 received 23 settings 87 settings for call divert 94 transferring 22 camera 30 adjusting brightness 31 , 34 adjusting contrast 31 , 34 night mode 31 saving video clips 34 self-timer 32 send ing im ages 31 sequence mode 32 video recorder settings 34 CD-ROM 82 certificates 93 chat See instant messaging clear screen See standby mode Clearing memory Log information 100 clock alarm 16 settings 16 snooze 16 codes 91 lock code PIN code 92 PIN2 code 92 computer connections 82 conference call 21 connection settings 88 contact cards inserting pictures 26 storing DTMF tones 23 contrast setting in camera 31 , 34 copying contacts b etween the SI M card and device memory 27
Index 108 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. text 45 copyright protection see activation keys cutting text 45 D data connections details 83 ending 83 date settings 91 digital rights management, DRM see activation keys DNS, domain name service, glossary explanation 90 E editing videos 37 adding effects 37 adding sound clips 37 adding transitions 37 custom video clips 37 e-mail 46 offline 52 opening 50 remote mailbox 49 retrieving from mailbox 50 settings 54 viewing attachments 51 F file formats JAD file 96 JAR file 96 , 97 RealPlayer 39 SIS file 96 file manager 17 fixed dialling 91 G gallery 35 H handsfree see loudspeaker headset s ettings 95 I instant messag ing 73 blocking 76 connecting to a server 73 groups 77 individ ual conver sations 75 recording the messages 75 sending a private message 74 sending instan t messages 74 user ID, glossary expl anation 75 Internet access points (IAP) See access points IP address, glossary explanation 90 J Java See applications, Java L list 89 lock cod e 92 log erasing contents 25 filtering 25 log duration 25 loopset settings 95 loudspeaker 17 activating 17 turning off 17 M mailbox 49 media files fast forward 40 file formats 39 mute s ound 40 rewind 40 memory clearing memory 23 , 24 viewing memory consumption 18 memory card 19 menu rearranging 12
Index 109 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. messaging e-mail 46 multimedia message 46 text message 46 multimedia messages 46 mute sound 40 my home city 17 P packet data connections 82 GPRS, glossary explanation 88 settings 90 pasting text 45 PC connections via Bluetooth or USB cable 82 PC Suite calendar data 59 synchronisation 82 transferring images to a PC 35 transferring music files to your memory card 35 viewing phone memory data 18 personalisation 14 PIN code 92 R recording video 34 recording voice tags 28 , 95 reminder See calendar, alarm remote mailbox 49 resolution, glossary exp lanation 33 ringing tones adding a personal ringing tone 27 receiving in a text message 49 removing a personal ringing tone 27 S security code See lock code sending contact cards, business cards 27 images 31 video clips 38 service commands 43 settings access codes 91 access points 89 Bluetooth connection 79 calendar 59 call barring 94 call diverting 94 certificates 93 data connections 88 date and time 91 display 87 headset 95 IM setting s 73 , 78 language 86 lock code 92 loopset 95 original settings 86 personalising the phone 12 PIN code 92 screen saver 87 UPIN code 92 UPUK code 92 wallet 71 wallet code 92 shortcuts camera 31 web connection 60 SIM card copying names and numbers to phone 27 messages 52 names and numbers 27 SIS file 96 SMS centre, short mes sage service centre 53 snooze alarm clock 16 calendar alarm 58 software transferring a file to your device 96
Index 110 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. sound clips 35 sounds muting a ringi ng tone 22 recording sounds 68 speed dialling 21 standby mode 12 synchronisation 83 T text message 46 text message service centre adding new 53 thumbnail images in a contact card 26 time settings 91 transferring content from another phone 13 U UPIN code 92 UPUK code 92 USB cable 82 USSD commands 43 V video clips 35 video player See RealPlayer video recorder See camera voice dialling 28 , 95 voice mailbox 21 changing the phone number 21 diverting calls to voice mailbox 94 voice messages 21 voice tags 28 , 95 adding 28 , 95 making calls 28 volume co ntrol 17 during a call 21 loudspeaker 17 W wallet 69 entering the wallet code 70 resetting wallet code 72 settings 71 storing card details 70 viewing ticket details 71 wallet code 70 , 92 web access points, see access p oints access points, see access points
9237084_LA_1.fh10 27.1.2005 21:21 Page 2
2 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, NOKIA CORPORATION declare under our sole respo nsibility that the product RM-57 is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Directive: 1999/5/ EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at http://www .nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/ Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfe r, distribu tion or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without t he prior written permission of Nokia is pro hibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, and Pop-Po rt are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Othe r product and company names menti oned herein may be trademark s or tradenames of their re spective owners. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Software Ltd (c) 1998- 200(5). Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are tra demarks or registered trademar ks of Sun Microsystems , Inc. Bluetooth is a registered trade m ark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Stac î, LZS î, é1996, Stac, Inc., é1994-1996 Microsoft Corporation. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Hi/fn î, LZS î,é1988-98, Hi/fn. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Ot her patents pending. Part of the software in this product is é Copyright ANT Ltd. 1998. All rights reserved. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 tex t input software Copyright (C) 1997-2005. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. USE OF THIS PR ODUCT IN ANY M ANNER THAT COMP LIES WITH THE M PEG-4 VISUAL STANDA RD IS PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE DIRECTLY RELA TED TO (A) DATA OR INFORMAT ION (i) GENERATED BY AND OBTAINED WIT HOUT CHARGE FROM A CONSUMER NOT THEREBY ENGAGED IN A BUSINESS ENTERPR ISE, AND (ii) FOR PERSONAL USE ONLY; AND (B) OTHER USES SPECIFICALLY AND SEPARATELY LICENSED BY M PEG LA, L.L.C. Nokia operates a policy of conti nuous development. Nokia reserves the ri ght to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be responsible fo r any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequent ial or indirect dama ges howsoever caused. The contents of this docume nt are provided âÂÂas i sâÂÂ. Except as required b y applicable law, no warranties of a ny kind, either express or imp lied, including, but not limite d to, the implied warrantie s of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are made in re lation to th e accur acy, reliability or conten ts o f this document. Nokia reserves the r ight to revise this document or withdr aw it at any time without prior notice The availability of particular products ma y vary by region. Please check with the Nokia dealer neare st to you. Export Controls This device may contain commodities, tec hnology or software subject to expo rt laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion cont rary to law is prohibited. FCC INDUSTRY CANA DA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interf erence (for example, w hen using a telephone in close proximity to receiving eq uipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your te lephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contac t your lo cal service f acility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the conditio n that this device does not cause har mful interference.
3 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. ABOUT ADD-ON APPLICATIO NS FOR YOUR NOKIA 6681 In the sales package you will find a Reduce d-Size Dual Voltage MultimediaMemoryCard (RS-MMC) that contains additional applicat ions from Nokia and third-party developers. The content of the RS-MMC and the availability of applications and services may vary by countr y, retailer and/or netw ork operator. The applications and further information a bout the use of the applications at www.nokia.co m/support are available in sele cted languages only. Some operations and features ar e SIM ca rd and/or network dependen t, MMS dependent, or dependent on the compatibility of devices and the content format s supported. The availability of services may vary by country and region. Some services are subject to a separ ate charge. NO WARRA NTY The third party applica tions provided on the Reduce d-size MultimediaMem oryCard (RS-MMC) have been created and are owne d by persons or entities that are not affiliated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrights and/or intellectual property rights to these th ird party applications. As such, Nokia does not take responsibility for any end user suppor t or the functionality of these thir d party applications, nor the inform ation presented in the applications or these materials. Nokia does not provide any warra nty for these applications. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THE SOFTWARE AND/OR APPLICATIONS (COLLECT IVELY, THE "SOFTWARE") AR E PROVIDED "AS IS" WIT HOUT WARRANTY O F ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTE NT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. NEITHER NOKIA NO R ITS AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, E XPRESS OR IMPLIED, INC LUDING BUT NOT LI MITED TO WARRANTIES O F TITLE, MERCHA NTABILITY OR FI TNESS FOR A PART ICULAR PURPOSE OR THA T THE SOFTWARE WILL NO T INFRINGE ANY THIR D PARTY PATENTS, COPYRI GHTS, TRADEMA RKS OR OTHER RIGHTS. THERE IS NO WARRANTY BY NOKIA OR BY ITS AFFILIATES THAT ANY ASPECT OF THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMEN TS OR THAT THE OPE RATION OF THE SOFT WARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTE D OR ERROR-F REE. YOU ASSUME ALL RESPONSIBILITY A ND RISK FOR THE SEL ECTION OF THE SOFT WARE TO ACHIEVE YOUR INTENDED RESU LTS AND FOR THE INSTALLA TION, USE AND RE SULTS OBTAINED FROM IT. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMIT TED BY APPLICAB LE LA W, IN NO EVENT SHALL NOKIA, ITS EMPLOYEES OR A FFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY LO ST PROFITS, REVENU E, SALES, DATA, INFORM ATION OR CO STS OF PROCUR EMENT OF SUBST ITUTE GOODS OR SERVICE S, PROP ERTY DA MAGE, PERSONA L INJURY , INTERR UPTION OF BUS INESS, OR FOR ANY DIRE CT, INDIRECT, I NCIDENTAL, ECO NOMIC, COV ER, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR CONSE QUENTIAL DAMAGE S, HOWEVER CAUSED AND W HETHER ARISING UNDE R CONTRACT, TO RT, NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHER THEO RY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF THE INSTALLATION OR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF NOKIA OR ITS AFFILI ATES ARE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DA MAGES. BECAU SE SOME COUNTR IES/STATES/JUR ISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE AB OVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATI ON OF LIABILITY, BUT MAY A LLOW LIABILITY TO B E LIMITED, IN SUCH CASES, NO KIA, ITS EMPLOYE ES' OR AF FILIATES' LIABILITY SHALL BE LIM ITED TO 50 EURO. NOTHING C ONTAINED IN THIS DISCLAIMER SHALL PREJUDICE THE STAT UTOR Y RIGHTS OF ANY PA RTY DEALING AS A CONSUMER. COPYRIGHT (c) 2005 NOKIA. ALL RIGH TS RESERVED. NOKIA AND NOKIA CONNECTING PEOPLE ARE REGISTERED TRAD EMARKS OF NOKIA CORPO RATION. NOKIA CORPOR ATION NOKIA MULTIMEDIA MARKETING P.O. BOX 100, FIN-00045 NOKIA GROUP, FINLAND TEL. 358 7180 08000 TELEFAX 358 7180 34016 WWW.NOKIA.COM ISSUE 1 EN, 9236904
Contents Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Contents For your safety ............................. .............. 9 Personalise your phone .......................... 12 Set tones ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ... 12 Offline profile ........... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 13 Transfer content from an other phone .................. ......... 13 Change the look of your phone .. ..................... ......... ....... 14 Active standby mode ..... ............ .................................. ....... 15 Your phone ........................... ................... 16 Put on the wrist st rap ........ ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 16 Clock............. ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... 16 Clock s ettings........... .......... ......... ...... ......... .......... .........16 World clock............... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 17 Volume a nd loudspeaker con trol ........... ......... ......... ....... 17 File manager ............... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... ..... 17 View memory consumption ...... ........... ......... ......... ... 18 Memory lowâÂÂfree memory .............. ......... ......... ....... 18 Memory ca rd tool ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ..... 19 Format a memory card ............... ......... ......... ......... ..... 19 Make calls ............................ ................... 21 Call ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ...... .......... ...... ... 21 Speed dial a phone number ................. ......... ............ 21 Make a c onference call............ ......... ...... .......... ......... 21 Answer or reje ct a call ......... ......... ......... ......... .......... ...... ... 22 Call wa iting (network servic e) .............. .......... ......... 22 Options during a call .................. ......... ......... ......... ..... 23 Log ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... 23 Recent calls ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ..... 23 Call duration ........ ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ....... 23 Packet data ..... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 24 Monitor all communication event s ............ ............ 24 Contacts (Phonebook) ......... .................... 26 Save names a nd numbers ............... ......... ......... ......... ....... 26 Default numbers an d addresses ........... .......... ......... 26 Copy contacts....... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 27 SIM directory and othe r SIM services ............ ....... 27 Add ringing tones for conta cts ................ ......... ........... ... 27 Voice dialling ........ ........... .................................. ............ ....... 28 Add a voice ta g .............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ... 28 Make a c all with a voice ta g ............... ............ ......... 28 Create contact groups ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ... 29 Remove members from a group ................ ........... ... 29
Contents Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery ......................... ........ 30 Camera .... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .. 30 Take pictures............... ......... ......... ......... .......... ...... ....... 30 Take pictures in a sequence .............. .......... ......... .... 32 You in the picture âÂÂself-timer .......... .......... ......... .... 32 The flash....... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ......... 32 Adjust colour and lighting ...... .................. ......... ....... 32 Adjust c amera settings ..... ......... ......... .......... ......... .... 33 Record videos ................ ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .. 33 Adjust v ideo recorder settings ............... ......... ......... 34 Gallery .............. ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... .... 35 View images ................ ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... 35 Imaging ...................... ............................... 37 Video editor ............... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 37 Edit video, soun d, and transitions ............... ......... .. 37 Image manager .............. ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... .. 38 Image print ................ ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... 38 Printer selection..... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... 39 Print preview .............. ......... ......... ......... .......... ...... ....... 39 Print settings .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .. 39 RealPlayer⢠....... ........... ....................... ........................... ....... 39 Play video or sound c lips .............. ......... ......... ......... .. 40 Stream content ov er the air .......... ........... ......... ....... 40 Receive RealPlayer sett ings ...................... ......... ....... 40 Messaging........... ............................... ....... 42 Write text ............. ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... 43 Traditional text input .............. ......... ......... ......... ........ 43 Predictive text inputâÂÂDictiona ry .................. .......... 44 Copy text to clipboard ............ ........... .................. ...... 45 Write and send me ssages ................ ......... ......... ....... ........ 46 Receive M MS and e-mail s ettings .......... ......... ...... 47 InboxâÂÂreceive mes sages ........... ......... ......... .......... ......... ... 48 Multimedia messa ges......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ... 48 Data and set tings ....... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ... 48 Web service mes sages...... ....... ......... ......... ......... ........ 49 My folders ........... ............ ...................... ............ ........... ........ 49 Mailbox ........ ............ ........... ........... ....................... ........... ...... 49 Open the mailbox .......... ...................... .................. ...... 50 Retrieve e-mail me ssages ............. ......... ......... ....... ... 50 Delete e-mail messages.......... ......... ......... ......... ........ 51 Disconnect from the mailbox ...... ...................... ...... 51 OutboxâÂÂmessage s waiting to be sent ........... ......... ...... 52 View messa ges on a SIM ca rd ................. ......... ......... ...... 52 Messaging sett ings .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... . 52 Text message s..... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... 52 Multimedia messa ges......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ... 53 E-mail ............ ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ........ 54 Web service mes sages...... ....... ......... ......... ......... ........ 56 Cell broadcast.............. ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ...... 56
Contents Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Other settings ............. ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 56 Calendar ......... ............................... ........... 58 Create calenda r entries ........... ...... ......... ......... .......... ......... 58 Calendar vie ws ........ .......... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......... 59 Set a calendar alar m ........ ......... ...... ......... .......... ......... 59 Remove calendar entries ............... ......... .......... ......... 59 Calendar set tings ................ ......... ......... ......... ......... ..... 59 Web ........ ............................... ................... 60 Access the Web ........... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ..... 60 Receive browse r settings ........... ......... ......... ......... ..... 60 Enter the s ettings manually ......... ......... ............ ....... 60 Bookmarks v iew ........ ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... 61 Add bookmarks manually .. ............... .................. ....... 61 Send bookmarks ........... ........... .............................. ....... 61 Make a connect ion ........ .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ... 61 Connection security ...... ......... ......... ......... .......... ...... ... 62 Browse ............. ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ... 62 View saved pa ges ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 63 Download and purchas e items ........ ......... ........... ......... ... 63 End a connection ...... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ..... 64 Empty the cache ..... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 64 Web settings ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ..... 64 Office ..................... .............................. .... 66 Calculator .......... ...... ......... .......... ......... ...... ......... .......... ......... 66 Calculate percenta ges ................ ....... ......... ......... ....... 66 Converter ........ ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ..... 66 Set base currenc y and exchange ra tes ............. ..... 67 To-do............ ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... 67 Create a task list .......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 67 Notes.......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ... 67 Recorder ............. ...... ......... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ... 68 My own ................. ............................... .....69 Go toâÂÂadd shortcuts ........ ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ..... 69 Delete a sh ortcut ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 69 Wallet ....... ...... ......... ......... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ... 69 Create a walle t code ........ ...... ......... ......... .......... ......... 70 Store personal card de tails ................ ......... ......... ..... 70 Create person al notes .............. ...... ......... .......... ......... 70 Create a walle t profile ............. ......... ......... ....... ......... 71 View ticket details ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ... 71 Wallet settings ........... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... 71 Reset the wa llet and wallet code ............... ............ 72 IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) .... ............. 73 Receive IM s ettings ............ ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ..... 73 Connect to an IM server...... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... 73 Modify your IM settings ............. ........... ..................... ....... 73 Search for IM groups and us ers .......... ............ ......... ....... 74
Contents Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Join and leave a n IM group ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... .. 74 Chat ......... ....... ......... ...... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... 74 Record chats ........... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .. 75 View and sta rt conversations ............. ......... ......... ......... .. 75 IM cont acts ............ ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......... .... 76 Manage IM groups .............. ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... .... 77 Administrate an IM grou p ....................... ......... ......... ....... 77 Create a ne w IM group ............ ......... ......... ......... ....... 77 Add and remove group members ............ ......... ....... 78 Chat se rver settings...... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .... 78 Connectivity ....... .............................. ........ 79 Bluetooth connection ............. ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 79 Bluetooth connect ion settings .............. ......... ......... 79 Send data using a Blue tooth connection ............. 80 Pair devices ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... 81 Receive data using a Blue tooth conne ction ........ 81 Switch off Bluetooth conne ctivity .................. ....... 82 PC connections .............. ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... 82 CD-ROM .......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......... .... 82 Your phone as a modem............ ............ .................... 82 Connection man ager ........... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... .... 82 View data connection det ails ......... ......... ............ .... 83 Remote synchronisa tion ........ ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... 83 Create a new s ynchronisation profile ........ ......... .. 84 Synchronise data .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... .. 84 Device manager .............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ... 85 Server profile settings .... ........... ......... ......... ......... ...... 85 Tools .................................... ...................... 86 Settings ...... ......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... ........ 86 Phone settings ........... ....... ......... ......... ......... ......... ....... . 86 Call settings ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... ......... ....... . 87 Connection settings ........ ......... ......... ......... ......... ........ 88 Date and time................. ...... ......... ......... .......... ......... ... 91 Security .............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... . 91 Call divertin g ........ .......... ......... ......... ...... .......... ......... ... 94 Call barring (net work service)............... ........... ........ 94 Network......... ......... .......... ...... ......... ......... ....... ......... ...... 95 Enhancemen t settings ..... ......... ......... ......... ......... ...... 95 Voice commands ....... ............ ............................... ......... ...... 95 Add a voice command to an application .... .......... 95 Application manager ....... ........... .................................. ...... 96 Install applications and software ............... ............ 96 Remove applications and softwa re ......... ......... ...... 97 Application set tings ............ ....... ......... ......... ......... ...... 98 Activation keysâÂÂhandle copyright-protected files ... 98 Troubleshooting ......... .............................. 99 Q&A............. ......... ....... ......... ......... ....... ......... ....... ......... ....... ... 99 Battery information ......................... .... 102
Contents Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Charging and dischargin g ........ ........... ......... ......... ......... 102 Care and maintenance ......................... 103 Additional safety information ............. 104 Index ............................ ......................... 107
9 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete us er guide for further in format ion. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or dan ger. ROAD SAFETY CO MES FIRST Obey all l ocal laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should b e road safety. INTERF ERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the phone o ff near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Fol low any restrictions. Wireless phones can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELLI NG Don't use the phone at a refuelling point. Don't use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NE AR BLASTI NG Follow any restrictions. Don't use the phone where blasting is in progress. USE SENSI BLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Don't touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repa ir this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIE S Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompat ible products. WATER-RES ISTANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back- up copies or keep a written record of all important information.
10 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. CONNECTING TO OT HER PHONES When connecting to any other phone, read its user guide for detaile d safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGEN CY CALLS Ensure the phone function of the phone is switched on and in service. Press as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the start screen. Enter the emergency number, then press . Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the GSM 900/180 0/1900 network. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legitimate rights o f others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the phone must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. Network servic es To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of th e features in this device depend on features in the wi reless network to function. These network services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can utilis e network services. Your service provid er may need to give you additional instructions for th eir use and explain what charges will apply. Some netw orks may have l imitations that affect how you can use Network Services. For instance, some networks ma y not support all language- dependent character s and services. Your service provider may ha ve reque sted that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Cont act your service provider for more information. This wireless device is a 3GPP GSM Release 99 terminal supporting GPRS service, and is designed to support also Release 97 GPRS networks. However, there may be some compatibility issues when used in some Release 97 GPRS networks. For more information, contact your service provider. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some fe atures of this device, such as MMS, browsing, e-mail an d cont ent downloading using
11 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. the browser or over MMS, require network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Check the model number of any charger before use with this phone. This phone is in tended for use when supplie d with power from ACP-12 and LCH- 12. Warning : Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The us e of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you di sconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. Your phone and its en hancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of reach of small children.
Personalise your phone 12 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your phone Note: Your service provider or network operator may have requested a different order for menu items or the inclusion of differen t ic ons in the phone menu. Contact your servic e provider, network operator, or Nokia Customer Care f or assistan ce with any fea tures that differ from those described in this guide. ⢠To change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the screen saver , see âÂÂChange the look of your phoneâÂÂ, p. 14. ⢠To use the standby displa y for fast access to your most frequently used applicat ions, see âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 15. ⢠To customise the ringing tones, see âÂÂSet tonesâÂÂ, p. 12. ⢠To change the sh ortcuts assigned for the different presses of the scroll key an d selection keys in the standby mode, see âÂÂStandby modeâÂÂ, p. 86. ⢠To change the clock sho wn in the standby mode, select Clock > Options > Settings > Clock type > Analogue or Digital . ⢠To change the clock alar m tone, select Clock > Options > Sett ings > Clock Alarm tone and a tone. ⢠To change the calendar alarm tone, select Calend ar > Options > Settings . ⢠To change the welcome note to an image or text, select Tools > Settings > Phone > General > Welcome note or logo . ⢠To assign an individual ringing tone to a contact, select Contacts . See âÂÂAdd ringing tones for contactsâÂÂ, p. 27. ⢠To assign a speed dial to a contact, press a numbered key in the standby mode ( is reserved for the voice mailbox), and press . Press Yes , then select a contact. ⢠To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , New folder or Move to folder . You can move less used applications into folders , and place applications that you use more often into the main menu. Set tones To set and customise the ri nging tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environments, or caller groups, press , and select Tools > Pr ofiles . You can see the currently selected profile at the top of the display in the standby mode. If the Ge neral profile is in use, only the current date is shown.
Personalise your phone 13 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To change the profile, press in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate, and select OK . Tip! You can choos e Tone downloads to open a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start connection to a Web page to download tones. To modify a profile, select Tools > Pro file s . Scroll to the prof ile, an d sele ct Optio ns > Personalise . Scroll to the setting you want to cha nge , and press to open the choices. Tones stored on the memory card are indicated with . Scroll through the tone list and listen to each one before yo u make your selectio n. Press a ny key t o stop the sound. To create a new profile, select Options > Create n ew . Offline profile The Off line profile lets you use the phone without connecting to the wireless netw ork. When y ou activate the Offline profil e, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator. All wireless phone signals to and from the device are prevented. If you try to send messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. Tip! For information on how to change the alert tone for the calendar or clock, see âÂÂPersonalise your phoneâÂÂ, p. 12. Warning: I n Offline p rofile yo u cannot ma ke calls , except calls to certain emergency numbers, or use features that require networ k coverage. To mak e calls, change the profile to activ a te the phone function. If the device has been locked, you must enter the unlock code before you can change the profile and make calls. Warning: Your device must be switched on to use Offline profile. Do not switch the d evice on when wireless device use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. To leave the Offline profile, select another profile, and select Options > Activate > Yes . The phone re-enables wireless transmissions (providing there is suffici ent signal strength). If a Bluetooth co nnection is activated b efore entering the Offline profile, it will be deactivated. A Bluetooth connection is auto matic ally re activate d after leavin g the Offline profile. See âÂÂBluetooth connection settingsâÂÂ, p. 79 . Transfer content from another phone You can copy contacts, calend ar, images , video, and sound clips using a Bluetooth connection, fr om a compatible Nokia Series 60 phone.
Personalise your phone 14 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. You can use your Nokia 6681 device without a SI M card. The offline profile is automa tically activated when the phone is switched on without a SIM card. This allows you to use the SIM card in another phone. Before starting the transf er to your Nokia 6681 de vice, you must activate Bluetooth connectivity on both phones. On each phone press , and select Connect. > Bluetoo th . Select Bluetooth > On . Give a name to each phone. To transfer content: 1 Press , and select Tools > Transfer on your N okia 6681 device. Follow the in structions on the screen. 2 The phone searches for devices with Bluetooth connectivity. When it has finished the search, select your other phone from the list. 3 You are asked to enter a code on your Nokia 6681 device. Enter a code of your choice (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other phone, and select OK . 4 The Transfer application is sent to the other phone as a messag e. 5 Open the message to install Transfer on the other phone, and follow the instru ctions on the screen. The application is added to the main menu. 6 From your Nokia 6681 device, select the content you want to copy from the other phone. Content is copied from the memory a nd memory card of the other phone to your Nokia 6681 device a nd memory card. The copying time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Data is not removed from the other phone. Change the look of your phone To change the look of your phone display, such as the wallpaper, colour palette, an d icons, press , and select Tools > Themes . Th e active theme is indicated by . In Themes you can group together elements from other themes or select images from the Gallery to personalise themes further. The themes on the memory card are indicated by . Options in the Themes main view are Preview / Theme downlo ads , Apply , Edit , Help , and Exit . To activate a theme, sc roll to it, and select Options > Apply . To preview a theme, scroll to it, and select Options > Preview . To edit themes, scroll to a theme, and select Opt ions > Edit to change the following options : ⢠Wallpaper âÂÂThe imag e to be shown as a bac kground image in the standby mode.
Personalise your phone 15 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. ⢠Colour p alette âÂÂThe colours used on the screen . ⢠Screen saver âÂÂThe screen saver type: date and time, or a text you have written your self. See also Screen saver timeout settings, p. 87. ⢠Image in 'Go to' âÂÂThe background image for the Go to application. To restore the selected theme back to its original settings, select Options > Restore orig. theme when you edit a theme. Active standby mod e Use your standby display for fast access to your most frequently used applications. Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you are not able to change the m. To set the active standby mode on, press , select Tools > Setting s > Phone > Standby mode > Active standby , and press to switch active standby on or off. The active standby display is shown with default applications across the top of the screen, and calendar, to-do, and player events listed below. Scroll to an application or event, and press . The standard scroll key shortcuts available in the standby mode cannot be used when the active standby mode is on. To change the default appli cation shortcuts: 1 Press , select Tools > Settings > Ph one > Standby mode > Active standby apps. , and press . 2 Highlight a shortcut to an application, and select Options > Ch ange . 3 Select a new application from the list, and press .
Your phone 16 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your phone Put on the wrist strap Thread the strap, and tighten i t. Note: Use only No kia approved enhancements. Clock Options in Clock are Set alarm , Reset alarm , Remove alarm , Sett ings , He lp , and Exit . Press , and selec t Clock . To set a n ew alarm , select Op tions > Set alarm . Enter the alarm tim e, and select OK . When the alar m is active, the indicator is shown. To turn of f the alarm, select St op . When the alarm tone sounds, select Snooze to stop the alarm for five minutes, after which it will resume. Yo u can do this a maximum of five times. If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone . If you select St op , the device asks whether you want to activat e the device for calls. S elect No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. To cancel an alarm, select Clock > Op tions > Remove alarm . Clock settings To change the clock settings, select Op tions > Se ttings in the clock. To change the clock shown in the standby mode, scroll down, and select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone ne twork to update the time, date, and time zone information to y our phone (network service), scroll down, and select Auto t ime update . For the Auto time up date setting to take effect, the phone restarts. To change the alarm tone, scroll down, and select Clock alarm tone .
Your phone 17 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To change the daylight -savin g time status, scroll down, and select Daylight-saving . Select On to add one hour to the My home city time. See âÂÂWorld clockâ on p. 17. When the daylight-saving is active, the indicator is shown in the clock main view. World clock Open Clo ck , and press to open the world clock view. In the world clock view, you can view the time in different cities. To add cities to the list , select Options > Add city . Enter the first letter s of the city nam e. The search field appears automatically, and the matching cities are displayed. Select a city. You can a dd a maximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your current city, scroll to a city, and select Option s > My home city . The city is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in your phone is changed according to the city selected. Check that the time is correct and matches your time zone. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the volume level when you have an active ca ll or are listening to a sound, pr ess or , respectively. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and lis ten to the phone from a short distan ce without having to hold the phone to your ear, f or example, ha ving it on a table nearby. Sound applica tions use the loudspea ker by default . ⢠To locate the loudspeaker, see the Quick Start Guide, âÂÂKeys and partsâÂÂ. ⢠To use the loudspeaker during a call, start a call, and pres s . Important: Do not hold the phone near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. ⢠To turn off the loudspeaker when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, press . File manager Many features of the phone use memory to store data. These features include contac ts, messages, images, ringing tones, calendar and to-do notes, documents, and downloaded applicat ions. The free memory available depend s on how muc h data i s already saved in the phone memory. You can use a memory card as ex tra stora ge
Your phone 18 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. space. Memory cards ar e rewritable, so you can delete and save data on a memory card. To browse files and folders in the phone memory or on a memory card (if inse rted), pres s , a nd select Tools > File mgr. . The phone memory view ( ) opens. Press to open the memory card view ( ). To move or copy files to a folder, press and at the same time to mark a file, and select Options > Move to folder or Copy to folder . Icons in File mgr. : Folder Folder that ha s a subfolder To find a fil e, select Options > Find and the memor y from which to search, and enter a search text that matches the file na me. Tip! You ca n use Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite to view the different memories in your phone. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. View memory consumption To view what types of data you have in the phone and how much memory the different data types consume, select Options > Memory details . Scroll d own to Free memory to view the amount of free memory in the phone. To view the amount of free memory on the memory card, if you have a card inserted in the phone, press to open the memory card view, and select Options > Memory details . Memory lowâÂÂfree memory The phone notifies you if th e phone memory or memory card memory is getting low. To free phone memor y, transfer da ta to a memory card in the file manager. Mark files to be moved, select Options > Move to folder > Memory card , and a folder. To remove data to free memory, use File mgr. , or go to the respectiv e applicati on. For example, you can re move the following: ⢠Messages from Inbox , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messaging ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages from the phone memory ⢠Saved Web pages ⢠Saved images, videos, or sound files ⢠Contact info rmation â¢C a l e n d a r n o t e s
Your phone 19 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. ⢠Downloaded applications. See also âÂÂApplication managerâÂÂ, p. 96. ⢠Any other data that you no longer need Memory card tool Note: This device uses a Reduced Size Dual Voltage (1.8/3V) Mult iMediaCard (M MC). To ensure interoperability, use only dual voltage MMCs. Check the compatibility o f an MMC wi th its manufacturer or provider. Press , and select Tools > Memory . You can use a memory card as extra storage space. See the Quick Start Guide, âÂÂInserting the memory cardâÂÂ. You can also back up information from phone memory, and restore the information to the phone later. You cannot use the memory card if the door of the memory card slot is open. Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Do not open the memory card slot door in the middle of an operation. Opening the slot door may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the card may be corrupted. Options in the memory card tool are Backup phone mem. , Restore from card , Format mem. card , Memory card name , Memory d etails , Help , and Exit . Use only compatible MultiMediaCards (MM C) with this device. Other memory cards, such as Secure Digital (SD) cards, do not fit in the MMC card slot and are not compatible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card may dam age the memor y card as well as the device, and data stored on th e incompatible card may be corrupted . ⢠To back up information from phone memory to a memory card, select Op tions > Backup phone mem. ⢠To restore information from the memory card to the phone memory, select Options > Restore from card . Format a memory card When a memory card is forma tte d, all data on the card is permane ntly los t. Tip! To rename a memory card, select Opt ions > Memory card name . Some memory cards are su pplie d preformatted and others require formatting. Consult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card before you can use it.
Your phone 20 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. To format a memory card, select Options > For mat mem. card . Select Yes to confirm. When format ting is complete, enter a name for the memory card, and select OK .
Make calls 21 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Make calls Call Tip! T o i n c r e a s e o r d e c r e a s e t h e v o l u m e d u r i n g a c a l l , press or . 1 In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. Press to remove a number. For international calls, p ress twice for the character (replaces the inte rnational access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Press to call the number. 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Tip! To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, press , and select Tools > Voice mailbox > Options > Change number . Enter the number (obtained from your service provider), and select OK . Pressing always ends a call , even if another appl ication is active. To make a call from Contacts , press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name; or enter the first letters of the name to the sear ch field. Matching contacts are listed. Press to call. To call your voice mailbox (network service), press and hold in the standby mod e. See also âÂÂCall divertingâÂÂ, p. 94. To call a recently dialled number in the standby mode, press to a ccess a list of the 20 last number s you called or attempted to call. Scroll to the number you want, and press to call the number. Speed dial a phone number To assign a phone number to one of the speed dialli ng keys ( â ), press , a nd select Tools > Speed dial . is reserved f or the voice mailbox. To call in the standby mode, press the speed dial key and . Tip! To speed dial a number by pressing and holding the key, press , and select Tools > Settings > Call > Speed dialling > On . Make a conference call 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Options > New call . The first call is automatically put on hold.
Make calls 22 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conf erence call, select Options > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Options > Conference > Add to conference . The phone supports conference calls between a maximum of six participants , including yourself. To have a private conver sation with one of the participants, select Options > Confe rence > Private . Select a participant, and press Private . The conference call is put on hold on your phone. The other participants can still continue the conference call. Once you have finished the private conversation, select Options > Add to conference to return to the conference call. To dr op a part icipa nt, se lect Option s > Confe rence > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conference call, press . Answer or reject a call To answer the call, press . To mute the ringing tone when a call comes in, select Silence . Tip! If a compatible headset is connected to the phone, answer and end a call by pressing the headset key. If you do not want to answer a call, press to reject it. The caller hears a line busy tone . If you have activated the Call divert > If busy function to divert call s, rejecting an incoming call also diverts the call. See âÂÂCall divertingâÂÂ, p. 94. When you reject an incoming c a ll, you can also send a text message to the caller informing why you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Sen d text me ssage . You can edit the text before sending it. See also Reject call with SMS , p. 87. Call waiting (n etwork service) You can answer a call while you have another call in progress if you have ac tivated Call waiting (network service) in Tools > Settings > Call > Call waiting . Tip! To change the phone tones for different environments and events, for example, when you wan t your phone to be silent, see âÂÂSet tonesâÂÂ, p. 12. To answer the waiting call, press . The first call is put on hold. To switch between the two calls, press Swap . Select Options > Tran sfer to connect an incoming call or a call
Make calls 23 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. o n h o l d w i t h a n a c t i v e c a l l a n d t o d i s c o n n e c t y o u r s e l f f r o m the calls. To end the active call, press . To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Options during a call Many of the options that you can use during a call are networ k services . Sele ct Options during a call fo r some of the following op tions: Mute or Unmute , Answer, Reject, Swap , Hold or Unhold , Activate handset , Activate loudsp. , or Activate hands free (if a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity is attached), End active call or End all calls , New call , Conference , and Transfer . Selec t from the following: Replace âÂÂTo end an active call and replace it by answering the waiting call. Send DTMF âÂÂTo send Dual Tone Multi-frequency (DTMF) tone strings, fo r example, a pass word. Enter the DT MF string or search for it in Cont acts. To enter a wait charac ter ( w ) or a pause ch aracter ( p ), press repeatedly. Select OK to send the tone. Tip! You can add DTMF tones to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. Log Recent calls To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dial led cal ls, pr ess , and selec t Connect. > Log > Recent calls . The phone registers missed and received calls only if the network su pports these functions, the phone is switched on, and within the networkâÂÂs se rvice area. Tip! When you see a note in the standby mode about missed calls, select Show to access the list of missed calls. To call back, scroll to a name or number, and press . Erasing recent call lists âÂÂTo clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear recent calls in the re cent cal ls main view. To clear one of the call registers, open th e register you want to erase, and select Opti ons > Clear list . To clear an individual even t, open a register, scroll to the event, and press . Call duration To monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select Connec t. > Log > Call duration .
Make calls 24 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Options > Clear timers . For this you need the lo ck code, see âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, âÂÂPhone and SIMâÂÂ, p. 91. Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connectio ns, press , and select Conne ct. > Log > Packet data . For example, you may be c harged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Icons in Log : Incom ing Outgoing Missed communication events To monitor all calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the phone, press , select Connect. > Log , and press to open the general log. For each communication event, you can see the se nder or recipient name, phone number, name of the service provider, or access point. You can filter the general log to view just one type of event and create new contact cards based on the log information. Tip! To view a list of sent messages, press , and select Messaging > Sent . Subevents, such as a text message sent in more than one part and packet data conne ctions, are log ged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre, or Web pages are shown as packet data connections. Note: When sending messages, your phone may disp lay Sent . This is an indication that the message has been sent by your phone to the message centre number programmed into your phone. This is not an indication that the message has been received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, check with your service provider.
Make calls 25 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To filter the log, sele ct Options > Filter and a filter. To erase th e contents of the log, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Option s > Clear log . Select Yes to confirm. To set the Log duration , select Options > Settings > Log duration . The log events remain in the phone memory for a set number of days after wh ich they are automatically erased to free memory. If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. Packet data counter and connection timer : T o view how much data, measured in kilobytes, has been transferred and how long a certain packet da ta connection has lasted, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicat ed by Pack. , and select Options > View details .
Contacts (Phonebook) 26 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) Press , and selec t Contacts . In Contacts you can add a personal ringing tone, voice t ag, or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You can also create cont act groups, which allow you to send text mess ages or e-mail to many recipient s at the same tim e. You can add re ceived conta ct informa tion (business ca rds) to cont acts. See âÂÂData an d settingsâÂÂ, p. 48. Contact information can only be se nt to or received fr om compatible devices. Options in Contacts are Open , Call , Create messag e , New contact , Open conversation , Edit, Delete , Duplicate , Add to gro up , Belongs to groups , Mark/Unmark , Copy , SIM contacts , Go to web address , Send , Contacts info , Settings , Help , and Exit . Save names and numbers 1 Select Options > New contact . 2 Fill in the fields th at you wa nt, and pres s Done . Options when editing a cont act card are: Add thumbnail , Remove thumbnail , Add detail , Delete detail , Edit label , Help , and Exit . To edit contact cards in Contacts , scroll to the co ntact card you want to edit, and select Options > Edit . To delete a contact card in Contacts , select a card, and press . To delete several conta ct cards at the same time, press and to mark the contacts, and press to delete. Tip! To add and edit contact card s, use Nokia Contacts Edi tor available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your phone. To attach a small thumbnail image to a contact card, open the contact card, and s elect Options > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. Default numbers and addresses You can assign default numbers or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a cont act has several numbers or addresses, you can easily ca ll or send a message to the contact to a cert ain number or addres s. 1 In contacts, select a contact, and press . 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an address you want to set as a default.
Contacts (Phonebook) 27 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Copy contacts Tip! To send contact informatio n, sele ct the card you want to send. Select Options > Send > Via text messag e , Via multimedia , or Via Bluetooth . See âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 42 and âÂÂSen d data using a Bluetooth connectionâÂÂ, p. 80. ⢠To copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your phone, press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory . Select the names you want to copy and Op tions > Copy to Contact s . ⢠To copy a telephone, fax, or pager number from contacts to your SIM ca rd, select Contacts , and open a contact card. Scroll to the number, and select Option s > Copy > To SIM d irectory . Tip! You can synchronise your contacts to a compatible PC with Nokia PC S uite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your phone. SIM directory and other SIM services Note: For availability, rates, and information on using SIM services, contact your SIM card vendor (network operator, service provider or other vendor). Press , and select Contact s > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory to see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In the SIM d irectory you can ad d, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, and yo u can make calls. Add ringing tones for contacts When a contact or group member calls you, the phone plays the chosen ri nging tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and yo ur phon e reco gnises it). Tip! Speed dialling is a quick way to call frequently used numbers. You can assign speed dia lling keys to eight phone numbers. See âÂÂSpeed dial a phone numberâÂÂ, p.21. 1 Press to open a contact card, or go to the groups list, and select a contact group. 2 Sele ct Options > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you wish to use for the individual contact or the selected group. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones.
Contacts (Phonebook) 28 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Voice dialling You can make a phone call by saying a voice tag that has been added to a contact card. Any spoken words can be a voice tag. Before using voice tags, note the following: ⢠Voice tags are not language-dependent. They are dependent on the speaker's voice. ⢠You must say the name exactly as you sa id it when you record ed it . ⢠Voice tags are sensitive to background noise. Record voice tags and use them in a quiet environment. ⢠Very short names are not accepted. Use long names and avoid similar names for different numbers. Note: Using voice tags may be difficul t in a noisy environment or during an eme rgency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialling in all circums tances. Add a voice tag Example: You can use a personâÂÂs name as a voice tag (for example, âÂÂJohnâÂÂs mobileâÂÂ). You can have only one voice tag per contact card. You ca n add a voice tag to up to 50 phone numbers. 1 In Contac ts , open the contact card to which you want to add a voice tag. 2 Scroll to the number to which you want to add the voice tag, and select Opti ons > Add voice tag . Tip! To view a li st of voice tag s you have defi ned, select Contacts > Options > Contac ts inf o > Voice tags . 3 Select Start to record a voice tag. After the starting tone, say clearly the words you want to record as a voice tag. Wait until the phone plays the recorded tag and saves it. is displaye d next to th e number in the contact card, indicating that a voice tag has been added to i t. Make a call with a voice tag You must say the voice tag exact ly as you said it when you recorded it. When you are making a call by saying a voice tag, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the phone at a short distance away, an d say the voice tag clearly. Press and hold . A short tone is p layed, and the note Speak now is displayed. The phone plays the original voice tag, displays the name and number, and dials the number of the recognised voice tag. Tip! To listen to, change, or delete a voice tag, open a contact card, and scroll to the number that has a voice tag (indica ted by ). Select Optio ns > Voice tags > Playback , Change , or Delete .
Contacts (Phonebook) 29 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Create contact groups 1 In Contacts , press to open the groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group 1 , and select OK . 4 Open the group, and select Options > Add members . 5 Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Select OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a group, select Optio ns > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Options in the gro ups list view are Open , New group, Delete , Rename , Ringing tone , Contacts info , Se ttings , Help , and Exit . Remove members from a group 1 In the groups list, open the group you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remov e from group . 3 Select Yes to remove the contact from the group. Tip! To check to which groups a contact belongs, scroll to the contact, and select Options > Belongs to groups .
Camera and Gallery 30 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery Camera Respect the personal rights of others and obey the local laws, regulations, and customs when taking and using images or video clips. With the Camera application you can ta ke pictures and record videos while on the move. The images and video clips are automatically saved in the Gall ery application. The camera produces JPEG images, and video clips are record ed in the 3GP P file forma t with the .3gp fi le extension. You can also send images or video clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using a Bluetooth connection. Open the camera lens cover on the back of the phone to open the camera, or press Camera . The Camera application starts when the camera lens cover is open, and you can see the view to be captured. Press to move between Image and Video views. Tip! You can inser t an image into a contact car d. See âÂÂSave names and numbersâÂÂ, p. 26. The Nokia 6681 device supports an image captur e resolution of up to 1280 x 960 pixels. The image resolution in these materials may appear different. Take pictures Press or to move between Image and Video views. Open the Image view. Options be fore taki ng a picture are Cap ture , New , Flash , Activate night mode / Deact. night mode , Sequence mode / Normal mode , Self-timer , Go to Galle ry , Adjust , Settings , Help , and Exit . Camera indicators show the following: ⢠The phone memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators (1) show where images are saved. ⢠The images indicator (2) estimates how many images, depending on the selected image quality, can fit in the remaining memory of your phone or th e memory card. ⢠The zoom indicator (3) shows the zoom level. Press to zoom in, press to zoom out. ⢠The flash indicator (4) shows if the flash is On () , Off () , o r Automatic () .
Camera and Gallery 31 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. ⢠The night mode indicator (5) shows that the night mode is active. ⢠The sequence mode indicator (6) shows that sequence mode is active. See âÂÂTake pictures in a sequenceâÂÂ, p. 32. ⢠The self-timer indicator (7) shows how much tim e is left before a picture is taken. See âÂÂYou in the pictureâÂÂself-timerâÂÂ, p. 32. Shortcuts are as follows: ⢠Press to activate or deactivate night mode. ⢠Press to activate or deac tivate sequence mode. ⢠Press to adjust brightness. ⢠Press o to adju st contra st. To take a picture, press . Do not move the phone before the image is saved. The image is saved automatically in the Images folder of Gallery . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 35. Saving the captured i mage may ta ke longer i f you hav e changed the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. When taking a picture, note the followin g: ⢠It is recommended to use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠To take ima ges or record vi deo in a dark environment, use the night mode. If you are using the night mode, the exposure time is longer and the camera needs to be kept still long er. ⢠To make lighting and colour adjustm ents befo re taking a picture, select Options > Adjust > Brightness , Contra st , White balan ce , or Colour tone . See âÂÂAdjust colour and lightingâÂÂ, p. 32. ⢠The quality of a zoomed picture is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture, but the image remains the same size. You may notice the dif ference in image quality if viewed on a PC. ⢠Camera goes into battery saving mode if there are no key presses within a minute. T o continue taking pictures, press . After the image has been ta ken, no te the following: ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, press . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to take a new picture, press . ⢠To send the image via Bluetoot h , via e-mail , or Via multi media , press . For more information see âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 42 and âÂÂBluetooth conne ctionâÂÂ, p. 79. ⢠To set the picture as wallpaper in the stan dby mode, select Options > Set as wallpaper .
Camera and Gallery 32 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Take pictures in a sequence Select Options > Sequen ce mode to se t the camera to take six pictures in a sequence. After the pictur es are taken, they are automatically saved in Gallery , and are shown in a grid. You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer Use the self-timer to delay the takin g of a picture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, select Options > Self-time r > 10 seconds , 2 0 seconds , or 30 sec onds . Select Activate . Th e self-timer indicator ( ) blinks and the phone beeps when the timer is running. The camera takes the pictu re after the selected delay has elapsed. The flash The camera has an L ED flash for low light conditions. The following flash modes are available: On , Off , and Automatic . Select Options > Flash > On to use the flash. If the flash is set to Off or Automatic during bright conditions, the flash still emits a low light when an image is captured. This allows the subject of the picture to see when the picture is taken. Ther e is no flash effect on the resultant picture . Adjust colour and lighting To enable the camera to reproduce colours and lighting more accurately, or to add ef fects to your pictur es or vide os, s ele ct Option s > Adjust , and select from the following: Brightness âÂÂScroll left and right to select the appropriate brightness setting. Contrast âÂÂScroll left and right to select the appro priate contrast setting . White balanc e âÂÂSelect the current lighting condition fr om the list. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. Colour tone âÂÂSelect a colour effect f rom the list. The screen display changes to match any settings mad e, showing you how the final pictures or videos will look.
Camera and Gallery 33 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Adjust camera settings 1 Select Options > Settings > Image . 2 Scroll to the setting you want to change: Show captured image âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to see the captured image after it has been taken or No if you want to continue taking pictures immediately. Image quality â High , Normal , and Basic . The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. The quality of a zoom ed pictur e is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture, but the image remains the same size. You may notice the difference in image quality if viewed on a PC, for example. If you are going to print the image, select High or Normal image quality. Image resolution âÂÂSelect the resolutio n you want to use for the images you ar e going to take. Glossary: Resolution is a measure of sharpness and clarity of an image. Resolution refers to the number of pixels in an image. The more pixels, the more detailed the picture is, and the more memory it consumes. Default image name âÂÂSet a default name for the images you are going to take. You can replace the date with your own text (for example, âÂÂHoliday_2005âÂÂ). Memory in use âÂÂS elect where to store your images. Record videos Press or to move between Image and Video views. Open the Video view. Options before recording a video are Recor d , New, Activate night mode / Deact. night mode , Mute / Unmut e , Go to Gallery , Adjust , Settings , Help , and Exit . Video recorder indicators show the following: ⢠The phon e memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators (1) show where the video is saved. ⢠The current video length indicator (2 ) shows elapsed time and time remainin g. ⢠The zoom indicator (3) shows the zoom level. Pres s to zoom in on your subject before or during recording. Press to zoom out. ⢠The microphone indicator (4) shows that the microphone is muted. ⢠The night mode indicator (5) shows that the night mode is active. Short cuts ar e as fol lows:
Camera and Gallery 34 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Press to activate or deactivate the night mode. ⢠Press to adjust brightness. ⢠Press to adju st contra st. To make lighting and c olour adjustments before taking a picture, select Options > Adjust > Brightness , Contrast , White balance , or Colour tone . See âÂÂAdjust colour and lightingâÂÂ, p. 32. Press to start rec ording. The rec ord icon is shown. If you use the camera to record a v ideo clip, the LED flash is constantly on in low pow er mode, indicating that a video clip is being recorded. To pause recording at any time, press . The pause icon starts to blink on the display. Press again t o resume recording. Video recording automatically stops if recording is set to pause and there are no ke y presses within a minute. Select Stop t o stop recording. The video clip is automatically saved to the Vide o clips folder of Gallery . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 35. After a video clip has been recorded: ⢠To immed iately pl ay the vi deo clip you just reco rded, select Options > Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, press . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to record a new video, press . ⢠To send th e vide o via Bluetooth , via e-mail , or Via multimedia , press . For more information, see âÂÂMessagingâÂÂ, p. 42 and âÂÂBluetooth connectionâÂÂ, p. 79 . Adjust video recorder settings Select Options > Settings > Video and the setting you want to change: Length âÂÂIf you select Maximum , the length of the video recording is re stricted by the available space on your memory card, and up to one hour pe r clip. You cannot send a video clip recorded like this by MMS, due to the recording properties. Select Short to record video clips up to 300 kB (approximately 30 seco nd s in duration) so that they can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Some netwo rks, however, may o nly support sending of multimedia messages with a maximum size of 100 kB. Video resolution âÂÂSelect 128x96 or 176x144. Default video name âÂÂDefine a default name, or select the date. Memory in use âÂÂDefine the default memory store: phone memory or memory card.
Camera and Gallery 35 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Gallery To store and organise your im ages, sound clips, playlists, video clips, streaming links, and .ram files, pres s , and select Gallery . Select Images , Video cli ps , Tracks , Sound clips , Links , or All fi les , and press to open it. You can browse, open, and create folders; and mark, copy, and move items to folders. Sound clips, video clips, .ram files, and streaming links are opened and played in the RealPlayer application. See âÂÂRealPlayerâ¢âÂÂ, p. 39. Tip! You can transfer ima ges from your phone to a compatible PC with Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied wi th your phone. Tip! You can transfer music f iles from your phone to your memory card with Nokia Audio Manager available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your phone. Tip! You can also transfe r files from your phone to your memory card using the MMC card r eader supplied in the sales package. Press to open a file or a folder. Images are opened in the image viewer. See âÂÂView imagesâÂÂ, p. 35. To copy or move files to the memory card or to phone memory, select a file and Options > Organise > Copy to memory card / Move to memory ca rd or Copy to phone mem. / Move to phone mem. . Files stored on the memory card are indicated with . To download files into Gallery in one of the main folders using the browser, select Graphic downls. , Video downlds. , Track downlds. , or Sound downlds. . The browser opens, and you can select a bookmark from wh ich site to downl oad. To search for a file, select Option s > Find . Start to enter a s e a r c h s t r i n g ( f o r e x a m p l e , t h e n a m e o r d a t e o f t h e f i l e y o u are searching). Files that match your search are shown. View images Pictures taken with Camera are stored in Gallery . I mages can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through a Bluetooth connection. To be able to view a received image in the gallery, you need to save it in the phone memory or on a memory card. Open the Images folder in Gallery to start the image viewer, select an image, and press to view it. Options when viewing an image are Send , Set as wallpaper , Rotate , Zoom in / Zoom o ut , Full screen , Delete , Rename , View det ails , Add to 'Go to' , Help , and Exit .
Camera and Gallery 36 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. To zoom an image, selec t Options > Zo om in or Zoom out . You can see the zooming ratio at the top of the display. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To move the focus when you are zoomin g an image, use the scroll k ey. To see more of the image, select Options > Full screen . The panes around the image are removed. To rotate the image, select Options > Rotate . Press and hold to return to the normal view.
Imaging 37 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Imaging Video editor To creat e custo m video clips , press , and sele ct Imaging > Vid. editor . You can combine and trim vide o clips, and add soun d clips, tra nsitions, and effects. Transitions are visua l effects that you can add in the beginning and end of the video or between the video clips. Edit video, sound, and transitions 1 Mark and select one or more video clips. 2 Select Options > Ed it . In the edit video view, you can insert video clips to make a custom video c lip, and edit the clips by trimmi ng and adding effects. You can add sound cl ips and c hange their du ration. Tip! To take a snapshot of a video clip, select Options > Take snapshot in the play view, edit preview view, or in the cut view. To modify the video, select one of the following options: Preview âÂÂPreviews the custom video clip. Cut âÂÂTrims the video clip or a sound clip i n the cut video clip or in the cut sound clip view. Insert : ⢠Video clip âÂÂInserts the selected video clip. A thumbnail of the video clip is shown in the main view. A thumbnail consists of the first non-black view of the video clip. The name and length of the selected video clip is also shown. ⢠Sound clip âÂÂInserts the selected sound clip. The name and length of the selected sound clip is shown in the main view. ⢠New sound clip âÂÂRecords a new sound clip to the selected l ocation. Edit vi deo clip : ⢠Move âÂÂMoves th e video clip to the selected location. ⢠Add colour effect âÂÂInserts a colour effect on the video clip. ⢠Use slow motion âÂÂSlows the speed of the video clip. ⢠Mute sound / Unmute sound â Mutes or unmutes the original video clip sound. ⢠Remove âÂÂRemoves the video clip from the video. Edit so und clip : ⢠Move âÂÂMoves the sound clip to the selected location. ⢠Set duration âÂÂEdits the s ound clip length. ⢠Remove âÂÂRemoves the sound clip from the video.
Imaging 38 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. ⢠Dupl icate âÂÂMakes a co py of the selected video clip or sound clip. Edit transition âÂÂThere are three types of transit ions: at the start of a video, at the end of a video, and transitions between video clip s. A start transiti on can be selected when the first transition of the video is active. 3 Select Save to save your video. Define the Memory in use in Se ttings . The default is the phone memory. Tip! In the settings view you can define the Default video name , Default sc. shot name , and Memory i n use . Select Send > Via multimedia , Via Bluetooth , o r Via e-mail if you want to send the video. Contact your service provider for details of the maximum multimedia message size that you ca n send. If your video is too large to be sent in a multimedia message, appears. Tip! If y ou wa nt to se nd a v id eo cl ip th at is ov er th e maximum multimedia message size allowed by your service provider, you can send the clip using a Bluetooth connection. âÂÂSend data using a Bluetooth connectionâÂÂ, p. 80. You can also transf er yo ur videos using a Bluetooth connection into your Bluetooth-enabled personal computer, or by using a memo ry card reader (internal/ external). Image manager To browse your images visua lly, press , and select Imagi ng > Image mgr. 1 Press to select Phone mem. or Memory card memory. Image mgr. also shows how many folders or images are in the selected folder. 2 Open a folder to browse your images visually. Press and to move between images and folders. Press to view an image. Press and simultaneously to mark images for an image show. A check mar k is shown next to a selected image. Select Options > Image show . Press and to view the next or previous image in the show. Image print Use Image print to print your images using USB (PictBridge-compliant), a Bluetooth connection, or your
Imaging 39 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. MMC. You can select from a list of available printers displayed in the printer selection view. Note: To print to a PictBridge-compliant printer, select Image print before you connect the USB cable. Press , and select Imaging > Image print . Select the images you want to print. Options in the image selection view are Print , Mark/ Unmark , Open (displayed when you select an album), Help , and Exit . Printer selection Once you have se lected ima ges you want to pr int, a list of available printing devices is displayed. If you have connected a PictBridge-compliant USB printer using the DKU-2 cable supplied with the phone, the printer is automatically displayed. Select the device you want to use. The print preview screen is displayed. Print preview After you select a printing device, the images that you selected are displayed using pr edefined layouts. To change the layout, use the left and right scroll key to scroll through the available layouts for the selected printer. If you selected more images than will fit on a single page, scroll up or down to display the additional pages. Options in print preview are Print , S ettings, Help, and Exit . Print settings The available options vary depending on the capabi lities of the printing device you selected. To select the paper size, select Paper size , select the size of paper from the list, and select OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. RealPlayer⢠Press , and select Imaging > RealPlayer . With RealPlaye r , you can play video clips, sound clips, and playlists , or stream media files over the ai r. A stream ing link can be activated when you are browsing Web pag es, or it can be stored in the phone memory or memory card. RealPlaye r supports files with ext ensions such as .aac, .awb, .m4a, .mid, .mp3, and .wav. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. For example, RealPlayer attempts to open all .mp4 files, but some .mp4 files may
Imaging 40 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. include content that is not compliant with 3GPP standards and, therefore, is not supported by this phone. Options in RealPlayer when a clip is sele cted are Play , Play in full sc reen / Continue , Continue in full s cr. ; Stop , Mute / Unmute , Clip details , Send, Se ttings , Help, and Exit . Play video or sound clips 1 To play a media file stored in phone memory or on the memory card, select Options > Open and select: Most recent clips âÂÂTo play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer . Saved clip âÂÂTo play a file saved in Gallery . See âÂÂGalleryâÂÂ, p. 35. 2 Scroll to a file, and press to play the file. Tip! To view a video clip i n full screen mode, press . Press again to change back to n ormal screen mode. Icons in RealPlayer : Repe at Random Repeat and rand om Loudspeak er muted Shortcuts during play: To fast forward , press and hold . To rewind through the media file, press and hold . To mute the sound, press a nd hold until the indicator is displayed. To turn on the sound, press and hold until you see the indicator. Stream content over the air Many service providers requir e you to use an Intern et access point (IAP) for your default a ccess point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. The access points may be conf igured when you first start your phone. Contact your serv ice provider for m ore informa tion. Note: In RealPlayer , you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer will recognise an http link to a .ram file. To stream content ov er the air, s elect a streaming link saved in Gallery , on a Web page, or received in a text message or multimedia mess age. Before live content begins streaming, your phone connects to the site and start loading the content. Receive RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a sp ecial text message from the network oper ator or service provider.
Imaging 41 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 48. For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Change the RealPlayer settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Video âÂÂTo select if y ou want to automatically repeat video clips after they finish playing. Audio âÂÂTo select if you want t o repeat playing of trac k lists and play sound clips on a track list in random order. Connection âÂÂTo select whether to use a proxy server, change the default access poi nt, and set the time- outs and port range used when connecting. Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Proxy setting s : ⢠Use proxy âÂÂTo use a proxy server, select Yes. ⢠Proxy serv . address âÂÂEnter the IP addr ess of the proxy server. ⢠Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the port number of the proxy se rver . Glossary : Proxy servers are intermediate server s between media servers and their user s. Some service providers use them to provide additional security or speed up access to browser pages th at contain sound or video clips. Network settings : ⢠Default access point âÂÂScroll to the access poi nt you want to use to connect to the Internet, an d press . ⢠Online time âÂÂSet the time for RealPlayer to disconnect from the network when you have paused a media clip playing through a network link, select User defined , and press . Enter the time, and select OK . ⢠Connection time-out âÂÂPress or to set the maximum time to elapse between selecting a network link and connecting to the media serv er, and select OK . ⢠Server time-o ut âÂÂPress or to se t the maximum time to wait for a response from the media server before di sconne cting, and select OK . ⢠Lowest UDP port âÂÂEnter the lowest port number of the server port range. The minimum value is 6970. ⢠Highest UDP port âÂÂEnter the highest port number of the server port range. The maximum value is 32000. Sele ct Options > Advanced settings to edit the bandwidth values for different networks.
Messaging 42 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging Press , and select Messa ging . In Messaging , you can create, send, receive, view, edit, and organise text messages, multimedia messa ges, e-mail messages, a nd special text messages cont aining data. You can also receive messages and data through a Bluetooth connection, receive Web serv ice messages, cell broadcast messages, and send service commands. Options in the Messaging main view are Open , Create message , Conne ct (shown if you have defined mailbox settings)/ Disconnect (shown if a connection to the mai lbox is active ), SIM me ssages , Cell broadcast , Service command , Settings, Help , and Exit . Note: These functions can only be used if they are supported by your networ k operator or service provider. Only devices that offer comp atible multimedia message, or e- mail features can rece ive and display these messages. Some networks might provide the recipient device with a Web page link to view multimedia mess ages. When you open Messaging , you can s ee the New message function and a list of folders: Inbox âÂÂContains received me ssages exce pt e-ma il and cell broadcast messages. E- mail messages are stored in the Mailbox . My folders âÂÂFor organising your messages into folders. Mailbox âÂÂIn Mailbox you can connect to your remote mailbox to retr ieve yo ur new e-mail messages or view your previously retrieve d e-mail messages offline. See âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. Drafts âÂÂStores draft messages that have not be en sent. Sent âÂÂStores the last 20 messages that have bee n sent excluding messages sent using a Bluetooth connection. To change the number of messages to be saved, see âÂÂOther settingsâÂÂ, p. 56. Outbox âÂÂA temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Reports âÂÂYou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service ). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message tha t has been sent to an e-mail address mi ght not be possible.
Messaging 43 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Tip! When you have opened any of the default fol ders, you can switch between the folders by pressing or . To enter and send ser vice requests (also known as USSD commands), such as activation commands for network services, to your service provider, select Options > Service command in the main view of Messaging . Cell broadcast is a network service that allows you to receive messages on various topics, such as weather or traffic conditions from your se rvice provider. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, co ntact your service provider. In the main view of Messaging , select Options > Cell broadcast . In the main view you can see the status of a topic, a topic number, name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow- up. Options in Cell b roadcast are Open , Subscribe / Unsubscribe , Hotmark / Remove hotmar k , Topic , Settings , Help , and Exit . A packet data connection ma y prevent cell broadcast reception . Write text Traditional text input and indicate the selected ca se. means that the first letter of the wo rd is written in upper case, and all other letters are auto matically written in lower case. indica tes number mode. is shown on the top righ t of the display when you are writing text using traditional text input. ⢠Press a number key ( â ) repeatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key tha n are printed on the key. ⢠To insert a number, press and hold the number key. ⢠To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appear s (or press to end the time-out period), and enter the lett er. ⢠To erase a ch aracter, pres s . Press a nd hold to clear more than one character. ⢠The most common punctuat ion marks are available under . Press repeatedly to reach the desire d punctuat ion mark.
Messaging 44 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Press to open a list of special charac ters. Use to move through the list, and press Select to select a char acter. ⢠To inser t a space, press . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠To switch between the diffe rent character cases Abc , abc , and ABC , press . Predictive text inputâÂÂDictionary You can enter any letter with a single key press. Predictive text input is based on a built-in dictionary t o which you can also add new words. When the dic tionary becomes full, the latest added word replaces the oldest. 1 To activate predictive text input, press , and select Dictionary on . This activates predictive text input for all editors in the phone. is shown on the top right of the display when you write text using predictive text input. 2 To write the desired word, press the keys â . Press each key only once for one letter. For example, to write âÂÂNokiaâ when the Engl ish dictionary is selected , press for N, for o, for k, fo r i, and for a. The word suggestion changes after each key press. 3 When you finish writing the word and it is correct, to confirm it, press , or press to add a space. If the word is not correct, press repeatedly to view the matching words th e dictionary has found one by one, or press , and select Dictionary > Matches . If the ? charac ter is shown afte r the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictio nary. To add a word to the dictionary, select Spell , enter the word (up to 32 letters) using traditional text input, and select OK . The word is a dded to the dicti o nary. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 4 Start writing the next word. Tip! To set predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly. Tips on predictive text input To erase a character, pres s . Press and hold to c lear more than one character. To change between the different character cases Abc , abc , and ABC , press . If you press quickly twice, predictive text input is turned off. Tip! Predictive text input tries to guess which commonly used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is needed. The
Messaging 45 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. order and availability of the punctuation marks d epend on the language of the dictionary . To insert a number in letter mode, press and hold the desired number key. To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . The most common punctuation marks are available under . Press and then repeatedly to search for the desired punctuation mark. Press and hold to open a list of special characters. Press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one. Press , select Dictionary , an d pre ss to s elec t one o f the following op tions: Matches âÂÂTo view a list of words that correspond to your key presses. Insert word âÂÂTo add a word (up to 32 letters) to the dictionary by using traditional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest adde d word. Edit word âÂÂTo edit the word using traditional text input. This is available if the word is active (underlined). Tip! When you press , the following options appear (depending on the editing mode): Dictionary (predictive text input), Alpha mode (traditional text input), Number mode , Cut (if text has been selected), Copy (if te xt has b een se lected), Pas te (when text has been cut or copied first), Insert number , Insert symbol , and Writ ing lang uage: (cha nges th e input lan guage for all editors in the phone). Write compound wo rds Write the first half of a compound word; to confirm it, press . Write the last part of the compound word. To complete the compound word, press to add a space. Turn predictive text inp ut off Press , and sel ect Dictionary > Off to turn predictive text input off for all editors in the phone. Copy text to clipboard 1 To select letters and words, press and ho ld . At the same time, press or . As the selection moves, text is highlighted. 2 To copy the text to the clipboard, while still holding , press Copy . 3 To insert the text into a document, press and hold , and press Paste , or press once, and select Paste . To select lines of text, press and hold . At the same time press or .
Messaging 46 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. To remove the selected text from the document, press . Write and send messages The appearance of a multim edia message may vary, depending on the receiving device. Copyright protections may prevent some images, ring ing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Tip! You ca n start to create a message from any application that has the opti on Send . Select a file (image or text) to be added to the messag e, and select Options > Send . Before you can c reate a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See âÂÂReceive MMS and e-mail settingsâÂÂ, p. 47 and âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. Options in the message editor are Send , Add recipient , Insert , Attach ments (e-mail), Preview (MMS), Objects (MMS), Remove (MMS), Delete , Check contacts , Message details , Sendi ng options , Help , and Exit . 1 Select New message . A list of message options opens. Text m essage âÂÂto send a text message. Multimedia message âÂÂto send a multimedia message (MMS). E-mail âÂÂto send an e-mail. If you have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. Tip! Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. You can mark several recipients at a time. 2 Press to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. Press to add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients. You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3 Press to move to the message field. 4 Write the message. 5 To add a medi a object to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert object > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . When sound is added, is shown in the navigation bar. 6 If you sel ect Insert new > Sound clip , Reco rder opens, and you can record a new sound. Press Select , the new sound is automatically saved, and a copy is inserted in the message. Select Opt ions > Preview to see what the multimedia message looks like.
Messaging 47 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. 7 To add an attachm ent to an e-mail, se lect Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , or Note . E-mail attachments are indicated by , in the navigation bar. 8 To send the message, select Options > Send , or press . Note: Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the normal 160-character limit. If your message exceeds 160 charac t e r s , i t w i l l b e s e n t a s a series of two or more me ssages and sending ma y cost you more. In the navigation bar , you can see the message length indicator counting backwards from 160. For example, 10 (2) means that you can still add 10 characters for the text to be sent as two messages. Some characters may take more space than others. Note: E-mail messa ges are au tomatically placed in Outbox before sending. If sending does not succeed, the e-mail is left in the Outbox with the Failed status. Tip! When you send a multimedia message to an e- mail address or a de vi ce that supports the receiving of large images, use the larger image size. If you ar e not sure of the receiving device, or the network does not support sending large files, it is recommended that you use a smaller image size or a sound clip that is no longer than 15 seconds. To change the setting, select Options > Settings > Multimedia me ssage > Imag e size in the Me ssaging main view. Tip! In Mess aging you can also create presentations and send them in a mu ltimedia message. In the multimedia message editor view, select Optio ns > Create presentation (shown only if MMS cre ation mode is set to Guide d or Free ). See âÂÂMultimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 53. Receive MMS and e-mail settings You may receive the settings in a text message from your network operator or service provider. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 48 . For availability of and subscr iption to data services, contact your network operator or service provider. Follow the instructions given by your service provider. Enter the M MS setti ngs manu ally 1 Sele ct Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points , and define the settings for a multimedia messaging access point. See âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. 2 Sele ct Messaging > Options > Settings > Mult imedia messag e > Access point in use and the access point you created to be used as the preferred connection. See also âÂÂMultimedia messagesâÂÂ, p. 53. Tip! To send files other than sounds and n otes as attachments, open the appropriate app lication, and select Send > Via e-mail , if available.
Messaging 48 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Before you can send, receive, ret rieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, y ou must do the following: ⢠Configure an Internet access point (IAP) correctly. See âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. ⢠Define your e-mail settings corre ctly. See âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. You need to have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions give n by y our remote mailbox and Internet service provider (ISP). InboxâÂÂreceive messages Inbox icons: Unread messages in Inbox Unread text message Unread multimedia message Data rece ived throug h a Blueto oth conn ection When you receive a message, 1 new message is shown in the stan dby mode . Press Show to op en the message. To open a message in Inbox , scro ll to it, and press . Multimedia message s Import ant: Multimedi a mess age objects may contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Do not open any atta chment if yo u are not sure of the trustworth iness of the sender. When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a mess age, and simultaneou sly listen to a sound through the loudspeaker ( is shown if sound is included). Press the scroll key to lis ten to the sound. To see what kind s of media obj ects have been included in the multimedia message, open the message, and select Options > Obje cts . You can choose to sa ve a multimed ia object file in your phone or send it, for example, through a Bluetooth connection to an other compatible dev ice. You may also receive multimedia pr esentations. You can view these presentations by selecting Options > Play presentation . Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Data and settings Your phone can receive many kinds of text messa ges that contain data ( ), also called over-the-air (OTA) messages: Configuration message âÂÂYou may receive a text message service number, voice mail box number, Internet access point settings, access point login script settings, or e-mail settings from your network ope rator, service provider , or company information manage ment department in a configuration messag e. To save the settings, select Options > Save all .
Messaging 49 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Busines s card â To save the in formation to Contacts , select Option s > Save bu siness card . Certificat es or sound files attached to the business card are not saved. Ringing to ne âÂÂTo save the ringing tone, select Op tions > Save . Operator logo âÂÂFor the logo to be shown in the standby mode instead of the network operatorâÂÂs own identification, select Options > Save . Tip! To change the default access point settings for multimedia messaging, select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Access point in use . Calendar entry âÂÂTo save the invitation, select Options > Save to Calendar . Web message âÂÂTo save the bookmark to the bookmarks list in Web, select Options > Add to bookmarks . If the message contains both access point settings and bookmarks, to save the data, select Options > Save all . E-mail noti fication âÂÂTells you how many ne w e-mail s you have in your remote mailbox. An extended notification may list more detailed information. Tip! If you receive a vCard file that has a picture attached, the picture is saved to contac ts. Web service messages Web service messages ( ) are noti fications (for example, news headlines) and may contain a text message or a link. For availability and subscription, contact your service provi der . My folders In My folders , you can organise your messages into folders, create new folders, and rename and delete folders. Tip! You can use texts in the templates folder to avoid rewriting messages that you send often. Mailbox If you select Mailbox and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. See âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54. When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes.
Messaging 50 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Open the mailbox When you open the mailbox, you can choose whether you want to view the previously retrieve d e-mail messages and e-mail headings offline or connect to the e-mail server. When you scroll to your mailbox, and press , the phone asks you if you want to Connect to mailbox? Select Yes to connect to your mailbox, and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages . When you view messages online, you are continuous ly connected to a remote mailbox using a packet data connection. See also âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. Select No to view previously re trieved e-ma il messages offline. When you vie w e-mail messages offline, your phone is not connected to the remote mailbox. Retrieve e-mail messages If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to a remote mailbox. Import ant: E-mail messages may contain viruses or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Do not open any attachment if you are not sure of the trustwor thiness of the se nder. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e -mail . New âÂÂto retrieve all new e-mail messages to your phone. Selected âÂÂto retrieve only the e-mail messages that have been marked. All âÂÂto retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving mess ages, select Cancel . 2 After you have retrieved the e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online, or select Options > Disconnect to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline. E-mail status icons: New e-mail (offline or online mode): the content has not been retrieved to your phone (arrow outwards). New e-mail: the content has been retrieved to your phone (arrow inwards). The e-mail message has been read. The e-mail heading that has been read and the message content has been deleted from the phone. 3 To open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrieved (arr ow in the icon is pointing outwards) and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve t his message from the mailbox.
Messaging 51 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To view e-mail attachments, open a message that h as the attach ment indica tor , and sel ect Options > Attachments . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the phone; select Options > Retrie ve . In the Attachment s view, you can retriev e, open, or save attachments. You can also send attachments using a Bluetooth connection. Tip! If your mailbox uses th e IMAP4 protocol, you can define how many messages to retrieve, and whether to retrieve the attachments. With the POP3 protocol, the options are Headers only , Partially (kB) , o r Msgs. & attach s. . Delete e-mail messages To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the phone while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Option s > Delete ms g. from: > Phone only . The phone mirrors the e-mail headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your ph o n e . I f y o u w a n t t o r e m o v e the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, and then make a connection from your phone to the remote mailbox again to update the status. Tip! To copy an e-mail from the remote mailbox to a folder under My folders , select Opti ons > Copy to folder , a folder from the list, and OK . To delete an e-mail from the phone and the remote mailbox, select Option s > Delete ms g. from: > Phone and serve r . If you are offline, the e-mail is deleted first from your phone. During the next connection to the remote mailbox, it is automatically deleted fr om the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only after you have closed the connection to the remote mailbox. To cancel deleting an e-ma il from the phone and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection ( ), and select Options > Undelete . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, select Options > Disconnect to end the packet data connection to the remote mailbox. Tip! You can also leave your mailbox connection open and the new e-mails ( Headers only as default) will be retrieved from the remote mailbox to your phone automatically (only if the IMAP IDLE function is supported by your server). To leave the messaging application open in the background, press twice. Leavin g the connec tion o pen may in crease y our call costs due to the data traffic.
Messaging 52 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. View e-mail messa ges when offline When you open Mailbox the next time and you want to view and read the e-mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? qu ery. You ca n read the previously retrieved e-mail he adings, the retrieved e-mail messages, or both. You can also write new, reply to, or forward e-mail to be sent the next time you connect to the mailbox. OutboxâÂÂmessages waiting to be sent Outbox is a tempora ry storage p lace for m essages wait ing to be sent. Status of the messages in Outbox ar e: Sending âÂÂA connection is being made and the message is being sent. Waiting / Queued âÂÂThe message will be sent when previous message s of a si milar t ype have been s ent. Resend at %U (time)âÂÂThe phone will try to send the message again after a time-out peri od. Select Options > Send to restart the sending immediately. Deferred âÂÂYou can set documents to be on hold while they are in Outbox . Scroll to a message that is being sent, and select Op tions > Defer sending . Failed âÂÂThe maximum number of sending attempts has been reached. Sending has f ailed. If you were trying to send a text message, open the message, and check that the sending options are correct. Example: Messages are placed in the outbox, for example, when your phone is outside network coverage. You can also schedule e-mail me ssages to be sent the next time you connect to your remote mailbox. View messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messa g es, you need to copy them to a folder in your phone. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 Select a folder and OK to start copying. Open the folder to view the messages. Messaging settings Text messages Select Messaging > Opt ions > Settings > Text message .
Messaging 53 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Message centres âÂÂLists all the text message centres that have been defined. Msg. c entre in use âÂÂSelect which message centre is use d for delivering text messages. Receive report (network service)âÂÂTo request the network to send delivery reports on your messages. Wh en set to No , only the Sent status is shown in Log. See âÂÂLogâÂÂ, p. 23. Message validity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity pe riod, t he message is removed from the text message cent re. The network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. Message sent as âÂÂChange this option only if you are sure that your message centre is able t o convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your network operator. Preferred connecti on âÂÂYou can send text messages through the normal GSM network or through packet da ta, if supported by the network. See âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. Reply via same ctr. (network service)âÂÂChoose Yes , if you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message centre number. Options when editing text message centre settings are Ed it , New msg. ce ntre , Delete , Help , and Exit . Add a new text m essage centre 1 Sele ct Message centres > Options > New msg. centre . 2 Press , write a name for the message centre, and select OK . 3 Press and , and write the number of the text message centre. You receive the n umber from your service provider. 4 Sele ct OK . 5 To use the new sett ings, go back to the s ettings view. Scroll to Msg. centre in use , and select the new message centre. Multimedia messages Sele ct Messaging > Options > Settings > Mult imedi a message . Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia message. The options are Origin al (shown only when the MMS creati on mode is set to Guided or Free ), Small , and Large . Select Original to increase the size of th e multimedia message. MMS creati on mode âÂÂIf you select Gu ided , the phone informs you if you try to se nd a message that may not be supported by the recipient. Select Res trict ed ; the phone prevents you from sending messages that are not supported.
Messaging 54 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Access point in use (Must be defined)âÂÂSelect which access point is used as the preferre d connection for the multimedia message centre. Recept. in h ome net. âÂÂSelect whether you w ant the reception of the MMS messages in the home network to be Automatic , Defer retrieval , or Off . If you select Defer retrieva l , the multimedia messag ing ce ntre saves the message. To retrieve th e me ssage late r, set to A utomatic . Receptio n if roaming âÂÂSelect how you want the MMS messages to be retrieved outside the home network. When you are outside your home network, sending and rece iving multimedia messages may cost you more. If Reception if roami ng > Automatic is selected, your phone automatically makes an active packet d ata connection to retrieve the message. Select Reception if roaming > Off if you do not want to receive multimedia messages when you are outside your home network. Allow anon. messages âÂÂSelect No if you want to reject messages com ing from an anon ymous sender. Receive adverts âÂÂDefine whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements or not. Receive report (network service)âÂÂSelect Yes if you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the Log. Note: Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sen t to an e-mail address might not be possible. Deny report sending âÂÂSelect Yes if you do not want your phone to send delivery repor ts of received multimedia messages. Message validit y âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity period, the mess age is removed from the multimedia messagin g cent re. The network must support this feature. Maximum ti me is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. Tip! You may also obtain the multimedia and e-mail settings from your service provider through an OTA message. Contact your service provider for more information. See âÂÂData an d settingsâ on p. 48. E-mail Select Messaging > Opt ions > Settings > E- mail , or in the mailbox main view, select Options > E-mail settings , and from the following: Mailbox in use âÂÂSelect which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail. Mailboxes âÂÂOpens a list of mailbo xes that have been defined. If no ma ilboxes have been defi ned, you are prompted to do so. Select a mailbox to change the settings: Mailbox settin gs : Mailbox name âÂÂEnter a descriptive name for the mailbox.
Messaging 55 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Access point in use ( Must be defin ed )âÂÂChoose an Internet access point (IAP) for t he mailbox. See âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. My e-mail ad dress ( Must be define d )âÂÂEnter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Replies to your messages are sent to this address. Outgoing mail server ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e-mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your network operator. Contact your service provider for more info rmation. Send message âÂÂDefine how e-mail is sent from your phone. Select Immedia tely for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . Select When conn. avail. âÂÂE-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. User name âÂÂEnter your user name, given to you by your service provider. Password: âÂÂEnter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are p rompted for th e password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incomi ng mail s erver ( Must be define d )âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. Mailbox type: âÂÂDefines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings. If you are using the POP3 protocol, e-mail messages are not updated automatically in online mode. To see the latest e-mail messages, you must disconnect and make a new connection to your mailbox. Security (ports) âÂÂUsed with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. APOP secure log in (not shown if IMAP4 is se lected for Mailbox type )âÂÂUsed with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecti ng to the mailbo x. User settings : E-mails to retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂDefine how many new e-mails are retrieved to the mailbox. Retriev e âÂÂDefine which part s of th e e-mails ar e retrieved: Headers only , Partial ly (kB) , or Msgs . & attach s. (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to IMAP4). Retrieve attachments (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂChoose whether you want to retrieve e-mail with or without at tachments.
Messaging 56 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Subscribed folders (not shown if the e- mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂYou can subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox as well and re trieve content from thos e folders. Send copy to se lf âÂÂSelect Yes to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e-mail address . Include signature â Select Yes if you want to atta ch a signature to your e- mail messages. My name âÂÂEnter your own name here. Your name replac es your e-mail address in the r ecipientâÂÂs phone when the recipientâÂÂs phone suppor ts this function. Automatic retrieval : Header retrieval âÂÂWhen this function is on, messages are retrieved automatically. You can define when, and how often, the messages are retrieved. Activating Header retrieval may increas e your call cos ts due to the data traffic. Web service messages Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Service message . Choose whether you want to receive serv ice messages. If you want to set the phone to automatically activate the browser and st art a network connectio n to retrieve con tent when the phone r eceives a service message, select Download messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast Check the available topics and related topic numbers wi th your service provider, and select Me ssaging > Options > Settings > Cell broadc ast to change the settings. Recepti on âÂÂSelect On to receive cell broadcas t messages, or Off if you do not wis h to receive cell broadcast messages. Language â All allows you to receive cell broadcast messages in all su pported languages. Selected allows you to choose in which languages you wis h to receive cell broadcast messages. If yo u cannot find the desired language , select Other . Topic detection âÂÂIf you select On , the phone automatically searches for new topic numbers, and s aves the new numbers without a name to the topic list. Select Off if you do not want to save ne w topic numbers automatically. Other settings Select Messaging > Opt ions > Sett ings > Oth er .
Messaging 57 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Save sent messages âÂÂChoose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to the Sent folder. No. of saved msgs. âÂÂDefine how many sent messages are saved to the Sent folder at a time. The default limit is 20 messages. When the limit is re ached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use âÂÂChoose the memory to where you want to save your messages: Phone memory or Memory card . Tip! If Memory ca rd is selected, activate the offline profile before opening the memory card slot door or removing the memory card. Wh en the memory card is not available, messages are saved in the phone memory. New e-mail alerts âÂÂChoose whether you want to see the new e-mail indications, a tone, or a note when new mail is received to the mailbox.
Calendar 58 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar Shortcut : Press any key ( â ) in any calendar view. A meeting entry opens, and the characters you enter are added to the Su bject field. Create calendar entries 1 Press , and select Calendar > Optio ns > New entry and from the following: Meeting âÂÂTo remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time. Memo âÂÂTo write a general entry for a day. Anniversary âÂÂTo remind you of birthdays or special dates. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. 2 Fill in the fields. Use to move between fields. Alarm (meetings and anniversary)âÂÂSelect On , and press to fill in the Alarm time and Alarm date fields. in the day view indicates an alarm. To stop a calendar alar m, select Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. The reminder text stays on the screen. Select Stop to end the calendar alarm. Select Snooze to set the alarm to snooze. Repeat âÂÂPress to change the entry to be repeating ( is shown in the day view). Repeat until âÂÂYou can set an end date for the repeated entry. Synchronisation : Private âÂÂAfter synchronisation the calendar entry can be seen only by you and it wi ll not be shown to others with online access to view the calendar. Public âÂÂThe calendar entr y is shown to others who have access to view your calendar online. None âÂÂThe calendar entry will not be copied to your PC when you synchronise. 3 To save the entry, select Done . Tip! To send a calen dar note to a compatible phone, select Options > Send > Via text message , Via multime dia , Via Bluetooth , or Via e- mail (available only if the correct e-mail setti ngs are in plac e).
Calendar 59 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Calendar views Tip! Select Options > Settings to change the view that is shown when you open th e calendar or the starting day of the week. In the month view, dates that have calendar entries are marked with a small triangle at the rig ht bottom corner. In the week view, memos and anniversaries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. Icons in the day and week views: Memo Anniversary There is no icon for Meeti ng . To go to a certain date, select Options > Go to date , write the date, and select OK . Press to jump to today. Tip! You can mov e calendar and to-do data from many different Nokia phones to your phone or synchronise your calendar and to-do to a compatible PC using Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with the phone. Set a calendar alarm You can set an alarm to r emind you of a meeting or anniversary. This option is n ot available fo r notes. 1 Open an entry in which you want t o set an alarm, and select Alarm > On . 2 Set th e Alarm time and Alar m date . 3 Scroll down to Repeat , and press to select how often you want the alarm to be repeat ed. 4 Sele ct Done . To delete a calendar al arm, op en the entry in which you want to delete an alarm, and select Alarm > Off . Remove calendar entries Removing past entr ies in Calendar saves sp ace in your phone me mory. To remove more than one event at a time, go to the Month view and sel ect Option s > Delete entry and one of the following: Before date âÂÂDeletes all calendar en tries that take place before a certain date you define. All entries âÂÂDeletes all calendar entries. Calendar settings To modify the Calendar alarm tone , Default view, Week starts on , and Week view titl e , select Options > Settings .
Web 60 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web Various service providers ma intain pages specifically designed for mobile devices. To access t hese pages, press , and select Web . These pages use the wireless markup language (WML), extensible h ypertext markup la nguage (XHTML), or hypertext markup language (HTML). Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator or service provid er. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Shortcut: To start a conn ection, press and hold in the standby mode. Access the Web ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the Web page that you want to use. See the sections âÂÂReceive browser settingsâÂÂ, p. 60 or âÂÂEnter the settings manuallyâÂÂ, p. 60. ⢠Make a connection to the Web. See âÂÂMake a connectionâÂÂ, p. 61. ⢠Start browsing the pages. See âÂÂBrowseâÂÂ, p. 62. ⢠End the connection to the Web. See âÂÂE nd a connectionâÂÂ, p. 64. Receive browser settings Tip! Settings may be available on the Web site of a network operator or service provider. You may receive Web service settings in a special text message from the network oper ator or service provider that offers the Web page. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 48. For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Enter the settings manually Follow the instructions given to you by yo ur service provider. 1 Select Tools > Se ttings > Conne ction > Access points , and define the settings for an access point. See âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. 2 Select Web > Opti ons > Book mark manager > Add bookmark . Write a name f or the bookmark and the address of the page define d for the curren t access point.
Web 61 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Bookmarks view Glossary: A bookmark consist s of an Internet address (mandatory), bookmark title, access point, and if the Web page requires, a user name and p assword. Options in the bookmarks view are Open , Download , Back to page , Bookmark manager , Mark/Unmark , Navi gation opti ons , Advanced options , Send , Find bookmark , Deta ils , Sett ings , Help , and Exit . Note: Your device may have some bookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these site s. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions, for security or content, as yo u would with any Internet site. Icons in the bookmark view: The starting page defined for the default access point. If you use another default access point for browsing, the starting page is changed accordingly. The automatic bookmarks folder contains b ookmarks ( ) that are collected automatically when yo u browse pages. The bookmarks in this folder are automatical ly orga nised acco rdin g to domain . Any bookmark showing the ti tle or Internet address of the bookmark. Add bookmarks manually 1 In the bookmarks view, select Options > Bookmark manager > Add bookmark . 2 Start to fill in the fields. Only the URL address must be defined. The default access point is assig ned to the bookmark if no other one is selected. Press to enter special characters such as / , . , : , and @ . Press to clear characters. 3 Sele ct Options > Sa ve to save the bookmark. Send bookmarks Scroll to a bookmark, and select Opt ions > Send > Via text mes sage . Press to send. It is possible to send more than one bookmar k at the same time. Make a connection Once you have stored all the required connection settings, you can a ccess the pages. 1 Select a bookmark or enter the address in the field ( ). When you enter the address, matching bookmarks are shown above the field. Press to select a matching bookmark. Options when browsing (depending on the page you are viewing) are Open , Accept, Remove file, Open in viewer , Ope n Wallet , Service options ,
Web 62 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Bookmarks , Save as bookmark , View images , Navi gation o ptions , Advanced options , Show images , Send bookmark , Fi nd , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . 2 Press to st art to download the page. Connection security If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmis sion between the device and the Internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between the gate way and the content server (or place where the requested re source is stored) is secur e. The service provider secures the data transmi ssion between the gateway and the content server. Select Options > Details > Security to view de tail s about the connecti on, encrypti ons status, and inf ormation about serv er and us er authentication. Security features may be required for some services, s uch as banking services. For such connectio ns you need security certifica tes. For more information, contact your service provider. See also âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 93. Browse On a browser page, new links appear underlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images that act as links have a blue border around them. To open a link, to check boxes, and make select ions, press . To go to the previous p age while browsing, select Back . If Back is not available, select Options > Nav igati on opti ons > History to view a chronological list of the pages you have visited during a browsing session. The history list is cleared each time a session is closed. To retrieve the latest content from the server, select Options > Navi gation opti ons > Reload . To save a bookmark, select Options > Save as bookmark . Tip! To access the bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold down . To return to the browser view, select Options > Back to page . To save a page while browsing, select Options > Advanced options > Save page . You can save pages to the ph one memory or on a memory card, and browse them when offline. To access the pages later, pr ess in the bookmarks view to open the Save d pages view. To enter a new URL address, select Options > Navigation options > Go to we b address .
Web 63 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To open a sublist of commands or actions for the currently open page, select Options > Service options . You can download items such as r inging tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your phone, for example, a downloaded image is saved in Gallery . Shortcut: Use to jump to the end of a page and to the beginning of a page. Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from b eing copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Important: Only install software from sour ces that offer adequate protection agai nst harmful software. To download and view new We b service messages while browsing, select Options > Advanced options > Read service msgs. (shown only if there are new messages). See also âÂÂWeb service messagesâÂÂ, p. 49. Tip! Your browser coll ects bookmarks automa tically while you are browsing Web pages. The bookmarks are stored to the automatic bookmarks folder ( ) and automatically organised according to domain. See also âÂÂWeb settingsâÂÂ, p. 64. View saved pages If you regularly browse pa ges containing information which does not cha nge very often, you can sa ve and browse them when offline. In the saved pages view you can also c reate fo lders to st ore your saved browser pages. Options in the saved pages vi ew are Open , Back to page , Reload , Saved pages , Mark/Unmark , Navigation o ptions , Advanced options , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . To open the saved pages view, press in the book marks view. In the saved pages view, press to open a saved page ( ). To save a page while browsing, select Op tions > Advanced options > Save page . To start a connection to the browser service and to download the latest version of t he page, select Opt ions > Navigation options > Reload . The phone stays online after you reload the page. Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and vide o clips. These items can be provided free, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respec tive applications in your
Web 64 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. phone, for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Gallery . Import ant: Only install app lications from sources that offer adequate protection against harmful software. 1 To download the item, scroll to the link, and press . If the item is pr ovided free, select Accept . Once downloaded, the content is automatically opened in a suitable application. To cancel the download, select Cancel . 2 Select the appropriate option to purchase the item, for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ. 3 Carefully re ad all the info rmation pro vided. If the online content is compa tible, you can use your wallet information to make the purchase. 4 Select Open Wallet . You are prompted for your wallet code. See âÂÂCreate a wallet codeâÂÂ, p. 70. 5 Select the appropriate card category from your wallet. 6 Select Fill in . This uploads the selected wallet informa tion. If the wallet does not contain all information necessary for the purchase, you are requested to enter the remaining details manually. Note: Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringtones and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. End a connection Select Options > Advanced options > Disconnect , or press and hold to quit browsing and to return to the standby mode. Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the phone. Note: A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If yo u have tried to a ccess or have accessed confident ial information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use . The information or services you have accessed is sto red in the cache memory of the phone. To empty the cache, select Options > Navigation op tions > Clear cache . Web settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Default access point âÂÂTo change the default access point, press to open a list of availab le access points. See âÂÂConnection settingsâÂÂ, p. 88. Show images âÂÂTo sele ct if you want to load images whil e browsing or not. If you select No , to load images later during browsing, select Options > Show images .
Web 65 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Font size âÂÂTo choose the text size. Default encoding âÂÂIf text characters are not shown correctly, you may choose anot her encoding according to language. Automatic bookmarks âÂÂTo disable aut omatic bookmark collecting, select Off . If you want to continue collecting automatic bookmarks but hi de the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder . Screen size âÂÂTo select what is shown when you are browsing. Select Select. keys only or Full screen . Search page âÂÂTo define a Web page that is downloaded when you select Navigation options > Open search page in the bookmarks view, or when browsing. Volume âÂÂIf you want the browser to play sounds embedded on Web pages, select a volume level. Rende ring âÂÂIf you want the page layout shown as accurately as possible, select By q uality . If you do not want external cascading style sheets to be downloaded, select By speed . Cookies âÂÂTo enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Glossary: Cookies are a means of content providers to identify users and their preferences for frequently used content. Java/ECM A script âÂÂT o enable or disable the use of scripts. Security warnings âÂÂTo hide or show security notifi cations . Conf. DTMF se nding âÂÂChoose whether you wan t to confirm bef ore the ph one sends DT MF tones du ring a call . See also âÂÂOptions during a callâÂÂ, p. 23. Wallet > On âÂÂTo open the wallet automatically when a compatible browser page is opened. See âÂÂWalletâÂÂ, p. 69.
Office 66 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Office Calculator To add, substract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and percentages, press , and select Office > Calculator . Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculatio ns. To save a number in the memory (indicated by M ), sel ect Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve a number in memory, select Option s > Memory > Recall . To clear a number in memory, select Options > Memory > Clear . Calculate percentages 1 Enter a number for which you wa nt to calculate a percentage. 2 Select , , , or . 3 Enter the percentage. 4 Select . Converter To convert measures such as Length from one unit ( Yar ds ) to another ( Metres ), press , and select Office > Converter . Options in Converter are Select unit / Change currency , Co nversion type , Currency rates , Help , and Exit . Note that Conver ter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. 1 Scroll to the Type field, and press to open a list of measures. Scro ll to the measure you wa nt to use, and select OK . 2 Scroll to the first Unit field, and press . Select the unit from which you want to convert and OK . Scroll to the next Unit field, and select the unit to which you want to convert. 3 Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value. Press to add a decimal and for the , - (for temperature), and E (exponent) symbols.
Office 67 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Set base currency an d exchange rates Tip! To change the conversion order, enter the value in the second Amount fi eld. The result is shown in the first Amount field. Before you can make currency convers ions, you need to choose a base curre ncy and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base curren cy determines th e conversion rates of the other curre ncies. 1 Select Converter > Options > Curren cy rat es . A list of currencies opens, and you can see the current base currency at the top. 2 To change the base currency , scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base curr. Tip! To rename a currency, go to the currency rates view, scrol l to the cu rrency, a nd select Option s > Rename curr ency . 3 Add exchange rates. Scroll to the currency, and enter a new rate, that is, how many units of the curr ency equal one unit of the base currency you have selected. After you have inserted all the ne cessary exchange rates, you can make currency convers ions. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates because all previously set exchange rates are set to zero. To-do Create a task list Press , and select Office > To-do to write notes and maintain a task list. To add a note, press any key to start to write the task in the Subject field. To set the due date for the task, scroll to the Due date field, and enter a date. To set the pr iority fo r the To-do note, scroll to the Prio rity field, and press to select th e priority. The priority icons are ( High ) and ( Low ). There is no icon for Normal . To mark a task as completed, s croll to it in the To-do list, and select Option s > Mark as done . To restore a task, scroll to it in the To-do list, and select Options > Mark as not done . Notes Press , and select Office > Notes to write notes. You can send notes to other compa t ible devices and save plain text fil es (TXT format) t hat you r eceive to Notes .
Office 68 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Recorder Press , and select Office > Recorder to record telephone conversations and voice memos. If you are recording a telephone c onversa tion, both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording.
My own 69 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. My own Go toâÂÂadd shortcuts Default shortcuts: Opens Calend ar Opens Inbox Opens Notes To store shortcuts ( links to your favour ite images, notes, bookmarks, and so on), press , and select My own > Go to . Shortcuts are added only from the individual applications, for example, Gallery . Not all applic ations have this function. 1 Select an item from an a pplication to which yo u want to add a shortcut. 2 Select Add to 'G o to' . A shortcut in Go to is automatically updated if you move the item to which it is pointing (for example, from one folder to another). To change the identifier in the lower left corner of the shortcut icon, select Options > Shortcut icon . Delete a shortcut Select the shortcut, and press . The default shortcuts Notes , Calendar , and Inbox cannot be deleted. When you remove an a pplication or a docum ent which has a shortcut in Go to , the shortcut icon of the removed item is dimmed in the Go to view. The shortcut can be deleted next time you start Go t o . Wallet Press , and select My own > Wal let . Wallet provides you with a storage area for your personal information, such as cre dit and de bit ca rd numbers, addresses, and other useful data (for example, user names and passwo rds). The information stored in Wa llet can be retrieved while browsing to automatically fil l in online forms on browser pages (for example, when the service asks fo r credit card details). Data in Wall et is encrypted and protected with a wallet code that you define. Wallet automa tically closes af ter 5 minutes. Ente r the wallet code to regain access to the contents. You can change this automatic time-o ut period if required. See âÂÂWallet settingsâÂÂ, p. 71.
My own 70 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Options in the Wallet main view are Open , Settings , Help , and Exit . Create a wallet code Each time you open Wallet , you are prompted for a wallet code. Enter the code that you have created, and select OK . When you open Wall et for the first time, you must create your own wallet code: 1 Enter a code of your choice (4âÂÂ10 alphanumeric characters), and select OK . 2 You are prompted to verify the code. Enter the same code, and select OK . Do not give your wallet code to anyone else. If you enter the wallet code incorrectly on th ree consecutive occasions, Wallet is blocked for 5 minutes. The block time increases if further incorrect wallet c odes are entered. If you forget your wallet code, you mus t reset the code, and you will lose all in fo rmation stored in Wallet . âÂÂReset the wallet and wallet codeâÂÂ, p. 72. Store personal card details 1 Select the Cards category from the main Wallet menu, and press . 2 Select a type of card fr om the list, and pre ss . Payment cards âÂÂCredit and debit cards. Loyalty cards âÂÂMembership and store cards. Online acc. c ards âÂÂPersonal user names a nd passwords to online services. Address cards âÂÂBasic contact details for home or the office. User info cards âÂÂCustomised personal p references for online services. 3 Select Options > New card . A n empty form ope ns. 4 Fill in the fields, and select Done . You can also receive car d information directly to th e phone from a card issu er or service provider (if they offer th is service). You will be notified which category the card belongs to. Save or discard the card. You can view and rename a saved card, but you canno t edit it. You can open, edit, or delete the fields in the card. Any changes will be saved upon exiting. Create personal notes Personal notes are a means of storing sensitive information, for example, a bank account number. You can access the data in a personal note from the browser. You can also send the note as a message. 1 Select the Personal n otes category from th e main Wallet menu, and press . 2 Select Options > New note . An empty note opens.
My own 71 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. 3 Press â to start writing. Press to clear characters. 4 Select Done to save. Create a wallet profile Once you have stored your personal details, you can combine them into a wallet profile. Yo u can use a wallet profile to retrieve wallet da ta from different cards and categories to the browser, for example, when you are filling in a form. 1 Select the Wallet profiles category from the main wallet menu, and press . 2 Select Options > New profile . A new wallet profile form opens. 3 Fill in the fields or select an option from the listed items: Profile name âÂÂChoose and enter a name for the profil e. Payment card âÂÂSelect a card from the list. Loyalty c ard âÂÂSelect a card from the list. Online access card âÂÂSelect a card fr om the list. Shipping add ress âÂÂSelect an address from the list. Billin g address âÂÂBy default, this is the same as the shipping address. If you require a different address, select one from the address card category. User info card âÂÂSelect a card from the list. Receive e-receipt âÂÂSelect a dest ination from the list. Deliver e-receipt âÂÂSelect To phone , To e-mai l , or To pho. & e-mail . RFID sending âÂÂSet to On or Off . Defines whether or not your unique phone identification is sent with the wallet profile. 4 Sele ct Done . Example: By upload ing your pa yment card details you do not need to enter the card number and expiry date each time you need them (depending on the content being browsed). Also, you can retrieve your user name and password stored as an access card when connecting to a mobile service that requires authent icatio n. View ticket details You can receive notification s of tickets purchased online through the browser. Received notifications are stored in the wallet. To view the notifications: 1 Select the Ti ckets category from the main Wallet menu, and press . 2 Sele ct Options > View . None of the fields within the notification can be modified. Wallet settings From th e main Wallet menu, select Opt ions > Settings and the following:
My own 72 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Wallet code âÂÂChange your wallet code. You are prompted to enter the current code, create a new code, and verify the new code. RFID âÂÂSet the phone ID code, type, and sending options. Automatic close âÂÂChang e the au tomatic t ime-out pe riod (1âÂÂ60 minutes). After the time-out period has elapsed, the wallet code must be re-ent ered to gain access to the contents. Reset the wallet and wallet code This operation erases all contents of Wallet . To reset both the contents of Wallet and the wallet code: 1 Enter *#7370925538# in the standby mode. 2 Enter the phone lock c ode, and select OK . See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, p. 91. When opening Wal let again, you must enter a new wallet code. See âÂÂCreate a wallet codeâÂÂ, p. 70.
IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) 73 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) Press , and select Connect. > IM . Instant messaging is a network service which allows you to converse with other people using instant m essages and join discussion forums (IM gr oups) with specific topics. Various service providers mai nta in IM servers that you can log in to o nce y ou have registere d to an I M ser vice. Options in the IM main view are Open , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . Note: Check the availability of chat services, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator and/or service provider. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services . Receive IM settings Tip: To log in automatically when you s tart IM , without having to enter yo ur user ID and pass word eac h time, select Options > Se ttings > Server settings > IM login type > Automatic . You must save the settings to ac cess the service that you want to use. You may receive th e settings in a special text message, a so-called smart message, from the network operator or service provider that offers the I M service. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 48. You can also enter th e settings manually. See âÂÂChat serve r settingsâÂÂ, p. 78. Connect to an IM server 1 Open IM to have your phone connect to the IM server in use. To change the IM server in use and save new IM servers, see âÂÂChat ser ver settingsâÂÂ, 78. 2 Enter your user ID an d pa ssword, and press to log in. You obtain the user ID and password for the IM server from your service provider. You can select Cancel to stay offline; to log in to the IM server later, select Options > Login . You cannot send or receive messages while you are offline. 3 To log out, select Options > Logout . Modify your IM settings Sele ct Options > Sett ings > IM settings : Use screen name (shown only if IM groups are supported by the server)âÂÂTo enter a nickname (up to10 characters), select Yes .
IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) 74 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. IM presence âÂÂTo allow others to see if you are online, select Active for al l . Allow messages from âÂÂTo al low messages from all, select All . Allow invitations from âÂÂTo allow invitations only from your IM contacts, se lect IM contacts only . IM invitations are sent by IM contacts who want you to join their groups. Msg. scrolling speed âÂÂTo select the speed at which new messages are displayed. Sort IM contacts âÂÂTo s ort your IM cont acts Alphabetically or By online status . Availability reloading âÂÂTo choose how to update information about whether your IM contacts are online or offline, select Automati c or Manual . Search for IM groups and users To search for groups, in the IM groups view, selec t Options > Search . You can search by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID). To search for users, in the IM cont acts view, select Options > New IM contact > Search . You ca n search by User's name , User ID , Phone number , and E-mail address . Join and leave an IM group To join an IM group that yo u have sa ved, scroll to the group, and press . To join an IM group not on the list, but for which you know the group ID, select Options > Join new group . Enter the group ID, and press . To leave the IM gr oup, sele ct Option s > Leave IM g roup . Chat Once you have joined an IM group, you can view the messages that are exchanged there, and send your own messages. Options while chatting are Send , Send private msg. , Re ply , Forward , Insert smiley , Send invitati on , Leave IM group , Add to banned list , Group , Record convers. / Stop recording , Help , and Exit . To send a message, wr ite the message in the message editor field, and press . To send a private message to a participant, select Options > Send private msg. , select the recipient, write the message, and press . To reply to a private message sent to you, selec t the message, and select Option s > Reply .
IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) 75 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To invite IM contacts who are online to join the IM group, select Options > Send invitation , select the contacts you want to invite, writ e the invitation message, and press . Record chats Options in the recorded chats view are Open , Delete , Send , Mark/Unmark , Login / Logout , Settings, Help , and Exit . To record to a file the m essag es that ar e exchanged during a conversation or while you are joined in a IM group, select Option s > Record convers. , enter a name f or the conversation file, and press . To stop recording, sel ect Option s > Stop recording . The recorded conversation fi les are automatically saved in the Recorded chats . To view the recorded chats, in the main view, select Recorded chats , select the conversation, and press . View and start conversations Go to the Conversations view to see a list of the individual conversation participants that you have an ongoing conversation with. To view a conversation, scroll to a participant, and press . Options when viewing a conversation are Send , Add to IM contacts , In sert smi ley , Forward , Record convers. / Stop recording , Blocking options , End conversation , Help , and Exit To continue the conversation , write your message, and pres s . To return t o the c onversat ions lis t with out clo sing th e conversation, press Back . To close the conv ersation, select Op tions > End conversation . Ong oing conversations are automatically closed when you exit IM . To start a new conversation, select Optio ns > New conversation : Select recipient âÂÂTo see a list of your chat cont acts that are currently online. Scroll to the contact that you want to start a conversation with, and p ress . Glossary: The user ID is provided by the service provider to those who register to this service. Enter user I D âÂÂTo enter the user ID of the user you want to start a conversation w ith, and press . To save a convers ation participant to your IM contacts, scroll to the participant, and select Options > Add to IM contacts .
IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) 76 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. To send automatic replies to incoming messages, select Options > Se t auto reply on . Enter the text, and press Done . You can still receive messages. To prevent receiving messages from certain participants, select Options > Blocking options , an d select from the following: Add to blocked list âÂÂTo block messages from the currently selected pa rticipant. Add ID to list manually âÂÂTo enter the user ID of the participant. Enter the ID, and press . View blocked list âÂÂTo see the participants whose messages are being blocked. Unblock âÂÂTo select the user that you want to remove from the bl ocke d list . Press . IM contacts Go to the IM con tacts to retrieve chat contac t lists from the server, or to add a new chat contact to a contact list. When you log in to the server, the previously used chat contact list is retrieved from the server automatically. Options in the IM contacts view are Open conversation , Op en , Change contact list , Reload use r availab. , Belongs to groups , New IM contact , Move to other list , Edit , Delete , Switch tracking on , Blocking options , Login / Lo gout, Settin gs, Help , and Exit . To create a new contact, select Options > New IM co ntact > Enter manually . Fill in the Nickname and User ID fields, and select Done . To move a contact from a list on the server to the ret rieved list, select Op tions > New IM contact > Move from other list . To change the chat contact list, select Options > Change contact list . Select from the following options : Open co nversati on âÂÂTo start a new conversation or continue an ongoing conver sation with the contact. Switch tracking on âÂÂTo have the phone notify you every time the chat contact goes online or offline. Belongs to groups âÂÂTo see which groups the chat contact has joined. Reload user availab. âÂÂTo update information about whether the contact is online or offline. The online status is shown by an indicator next to the contact name. This option is not available if you have set the Availability reloading to Automatic in IM settin gs .
IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) 77 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Manage IM groups Options in the IM groups view are Open , Join new group , Create new group , Leave IM group , Group , Search , Logi n / Logout , Settings, Help , and Exit . Go to the IM groups view to see a list of the IM groups that you have either saved or are currently joined to. Scroll to a group, select Options > Group and one of the following: Save âÂÂTo save an unsaved group that you are currently joined to. View participants âÂÂTo see who are currently joined to the grou p. Details âÂÂTo see the group ID, topic, participants, administrators of the group (s hown only if you have the editing rights), the list of bloc ked participants (shown only if you have the editing rights), and whether private conversations are allowed in the group. Settings âÂÂTo view and edit the ch at group settings. See âÂÂCreate a new IM groupâÂÂ, p 77. Administrate an IM group Create a new IM group Sele ct IM gr oups > Opti ons > Create ne w group . Enter the settings for the group. You can edit the settings f o r an IM group if you have administrator rights to the gr oup. The user who creates a group is automatically given administrator rights to it. Group name , Group topic , and We lcome note âÂÂTo add details that the participants see when they join the group. Group size âÂÂTo define the maximum number of members allowed to join the group. Allow search âÂÂTo define if others ca n find the chat group by sea rchin g. Editing rights âÂÂTo define the chat group participants to whom you want to give rights to invite contac ts to join the IM group and edit the group settings. Group members âÂÂSee âÂÂAdd and remove group membersâÂÂ, p. 78. Banned list âÂÂEnter the participants that are not allowed to join the IM group. Allow private msgs. âÂÂTo allow messaging between selected participants only.
IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) 78 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Group ID âÂÂThe group ID is created automatically and cannot be changed. Add and remove group members To add members to a group, selec t IM groups , scroll to an IM group, and select Options > Group > Settings > Group me mbers > Selected only or All . To remove a member from the IM group, scroll to the member, and select Op tions > Re move . To remove all members, select Options > Remove all . Chat server settings Select Options > Settings > Server settin gs . You may receive the settings in a special text message from the network operator or service prov ider that offers the chat service. You obtain the user ID and password from your service provider when you re gister to the service. If you do not know your user ID or password, contact your service provider. To change the IM server to which you wish to connect, select Default s erver . To add a new server to your list of IM servers, select Servers > Options > New server . Enter the following settings: Server name âÂÂEnter the name for the chat server. Access point in use âÂÂSelect the access point you want to use for the server. Web address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the I M server. User ID âÂÂEnter your user ID. Password âÂÂEnter your login password.
Connectivity 79 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Connectivity Bluetooth connection Bluetooth technology enable s wireless connections to send images, video cl ips, music an d sound clip s, and notes, or to connect wirelessly to compati ble devices with Bluetooth technology such as computers. Sin ce devices with Bluetooth technology communica te using ra dio waves, your phone and the other d evice do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within a maximum of 10 metres of each other, although the connection can be subject to inte rference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 1.2 supporting the following profile s: Generic Ac cess Profile, Serial Port Profile, Bluetooth Printing Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, Headse t Profile, Handsfree Profile, Generic Object Exchange Profile , Object Push Profile, File Transfer Pr ofile, and Basi c Imaging Profile. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use No kia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their co mpatibility wi th this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Chec k with your local authorities or service provider. Features that use Bluetooth technology, or allow such features to run in the background while using other features, increase the dema nd on battery power and reduces the battery l ife. Bluetooth connection settings Press , and select Connec t. > Bluetooth . Enter the following: Bluetooth âÂÂSet to On or Off . My phone's visibility > Shown to all âÂÂYour phone can be found by other devices with Bluetooth technology or Hidden âÂÂYour phone cannot be found by other devices. My phone's name âÂÂDef ine a name for your phone. After you have set a Bluetooth conn ection and changed My phone's visibility to Shown to all , your phone and this name can be seen by other users with devices using Bluetooth technology.
Connectivity 80 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Send data using a Bluetooth connection There can be only one active Bluetooth connection at a time. 1 Open an application where th e item you wish to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery . 2 Select the item, for example, an image, and select Options > Se nd > Via Bluetooth . Tip! When s earchin g for devices, some devi ces may show only the unique addresses (device addresses). To find the unique address of your phone, enter the code * #2820# in the standby mode. The phone starts to search for devic es within ran ge. Devices with Bluetooth technology that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. You can see a device icon, the name of the device, the device type, or a short name. Tip! If y ou have searched for d evices earlier, a list of the devices that were found previously is shown first. To start a new sear ch, select More devices . If you switch off the phone, the list is cleared. To interrupt the search, press Stop . The device list freezes, and you ca n start to form a connection to one of the devices already found. 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds and you ar e asked to enter a passcode. Create your own passcode (1âÂÂ16 digits), and agree with the owner of the othe r device to use the same code. The passcode is used only once. Tip! To send text using a Bluetooth connection (instead of text messages), go to Notes , write the text, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices view. Glossary: Pairing means authentica tion. The users of the devic es with Blue tooth te ch nology should agree what the passcode is and use th e same passcode for both devic es in o rder t o pai r them . Devi ces tha t do no t have a user interface ha ve a factory-set passcode. When the connection has been established, th e note Sending data is shown. The Drafts folder in Messaging does not store messages sent using a Bluetooth connection. Icons for different device s: Computer Phone Audio or video
Connectivity 81 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Headset Other Check th e status of the Bluetoo th connection ⢠When is shown in the standby mode, a Bluetooth connection is active. ⢠When is blinking, your phone is trying to connect to the other device. ⢠When is shown continuously, the Bluetooth connection is active. Pair devices Tip! To define a short na me (nickname or alias), scroll to the device, and select Op tions > Assign short name in the paired devices view. This name helps you t o recognise a certain device duri ng device search or when a device requests a connection. Paired devices are easier to recognise; they are indicated by in the device search. In the Bluetooth main view, press to open the paired devices view ( ). To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . The phone starts a device se arch. Select the device. Exchange passcodes. See step 4 in âÂÂSend data using a Bluetooth connectionâÂÂ, p. 80. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings , select Options > Delete all . Tip! If yo u are currently connected to a device and delete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately, but the connection remains active. To set a device to be authorised or unauthorised, scroll to a device, and select from the following options: Set as authorised âÂÂConnections between your phone and this device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or author isation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compat ible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorised devices in the paired devices view. Set as unau thorised âÂÂConnection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. Receive data using a Bluetooth connection When you receive data u sin g a Bluetooth connection, a tone sounds, and you are a sked if you want to accept the message. If you acce pt, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inb ox folder in Messaging . Messages
Connectivity 82 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. received using a Bluetooth co nnection are indicated b y . See âÂÂInboxâÂÂreceive messagesâÂÂ, p. 48. Switch off Bluetooth connectivity To switch off Bluetooth connectivity , select Bluetooth > Off . PC connections You can use your phone with a variety of PC connectivity and data communications app lications, for example, the MMC card reader supplied in the sales package. With Nokia PC Suite you can, for example, synchronise contacts, calendar, and to-do notes between your phone and a compatible PC. For further information on how to install Nokia PC Suite (compatible with Windows 2000 and Windows XP), see the User Guide for Nokia PC Suite and the Nokia PC Suite help in th e âÂÂInstallâ section on th e CD-ROM. CD-ROM The CD-ROM should launch aft er you have inserted it into the CD-ROM drive of a compatible PC. If not, proceed as follows: Open Windows Explorer, right-click the CD-ROM drive where you inserted the CD-ROM, and select Autoplay. Your phone as a modem You can use your phone a s a modem to send and receive e-mail, or to connect to the Internet with a compatible PC by using a Bluetooth connectio n o r a data cable. Detailed installation instruct ions can be found in the User Guide for Nokia PC Suite in Modem options on the CD-ROM. Connection manager You may have multiple data connections active at the same time when you are using your phone in GSM networks. Press , and select Connect. > Conn. mgr. to view the status of multiple data connections, view details on the amount of data sent and received, and end connections. When you open Conn. mgr. , you can see th e following: ⢠Open data connections: da ta calls ( ) and packet data connections ( ) ⢠The statu s of each co nnection ⢠The amount of data uploaded and downloaded for each connection (shown for packet data connections only) ⢠The duration of each conne ction (shown for dat a calls only)
Connectivity 83 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary , depending o n network features, roundi ng off fo r billing, and so forth. To end a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Option s > Disconnect . To close all currently open connections, select Options > Disconnect all . View data connection details Options in Conn. mgr. main view when there are one or more connections are Details , Disconnect , Disconnect all , Help , and Exit . To view the details of a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Options > Details . Name âÂÂThe name of the Internet access point (IAP) in use, or the modem connection name if the connection is a dial- up connection. Bearer âÂÂThe type of data connection: Data call , High sp. GSM , or Packet d ata . Status âÂÂThe current status of the conn ection: Connecting , Conn.(inact.) , Conn.(active) , On hold , Disconnctng. , or Disconnected . Received âÂÂThe amount of data, in bytes, received to the phone. Sent âÂÂThe amount of data, in by tes, sent from the phone. Duration âÂÂThe length of time that the connection has been open . Speed âÂÂThe current speed of bo th sending and receiving data in kilobytes per second. Name âÂÂAccess point name used. Dial-up âÂÂThe dial-up number used. Shared (not shown if the conn ection is not shared)âÂÂThe number of applications using the same connection. Remote synchronisation Press , and select Connec t. > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronise your calendar and contac ts with various calendar and address book applications on a compatible computer or on the Internet. The synchronisation applicatio n uses SyncML technology for synchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the supplier of the calendar or address book application you want to synchronise your phone data with . You may receive syncronisation settings in a special text message. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 48.
Connectivity 84 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Create a new synchronisation profile Options in the Sync main view are Synchronise , New sync pr ofile , Edit sync profile , Dele te , View log , Set as default , Help , and Exit . 1 If no profiles have been de fined, the phone asks if you want to create a new profile. Select Yes . To create a new profile in addition to existing ones, select Options > New sync profile . Choose whether you want to use the default setting values or copy the values from an existing profile to be used as the basis for the new profile. 2 Define the following: Sync profile name âÂÂWrite a desc riptive name for the profile. Data bearer âÂÂSelect the connection type: Web , Bluetooth , or Data cable . Access point âÂÂSelect an access poi nt to use for the data connection. Host address âÂÂContact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. Port âÂÂContact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. User name âÂÂYour use r ID for the syn chronis ation server. Contact your serv ice provider or system administrator for your correct ID. Password âÂÂWrite your password. Contact your service provider or system administ r ator for the correct value. Allow sync requests âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to allow the server to start a synchronisation. Auto-a ccept sy nc reqs. âÂÂSelect No if you want the phone to ask you before a sy nchronisation initialised by the server is started. Network authen tic. (shown only if Data b earer is set to Web )âÂÂSelect Yes to enter a network user name and password. Press to view the user name and password fields. 3 Press to select: Calendar , Contacts , or Notes . ⢠Select Yes if you want to synchronise the selected database. ⢠In Remo te datab ase , select the synchronisation type: Normal (two-way synchronisation), To serve r only , or To phone only . ⢠Enter a correct path to the remote calendar, address book, or notes database on the server. 4 Press Back to save the settings and return to the main view. Synchronise data In the Sync main view, you can see the different synchronisat ion profiles and the kind of data to be synchronised. 1 Select a synchronisation profile and Options > Synchronise . The status of the synchronisatio n is shown at the bottom of the screen.
Connectivity 85 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, pre ss Cancel . 2 You are notified when th e sy nchronisation is complete. After synchronisation is complete, select Options > View log to open a log file showing the synchronisation status ( Complete or Incomplete ) and how many calendar or contact entries have been added, updated, deleted, or discarded (not sy nchronised) in the phone or on the server. Device manager Press , and select Connect . > Dev. mgr. . You may receive server profiles and di fferent configuration settings from your network operator, service pro vider, or company information management depa rtment. These configuration settings may include access point s ettings for data connections and other settings used b y different applications in your phone. To connect to a server and re ceive configuration settings for your phone, select Options > Start configuration . To allow or deny receiving of configuration settings from a service provider, select Enable config. or Disable confi g. . Server profile settings Contact your service provider for the correct s ettings. Server name âÂÂEnter a name for the configuration server. Server ID âÂÂEnter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. Server password âÂÂEnter a password to identify your phone to the server. Session mode â Select Bluetoot h or Web . Access point âÂÂSelect an access point to be used when connecting to the server. Host address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the server. Port âÂÂEnter the port number of the server. User name and Password âÂÂEnter your user name and password. Allow con figuration âÂÂTo receiv e configuration settings from the server, select Yes . Auto-accept all reqs. âÂÂIf you want the phone to ask for confirmation before accepting a conf iguration from the server, select No .
Tools 86 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools Settings To change settings, pr ess , and select Tools > Settings . Scroll to a setting group, and press to open it. Scroll to a setting you want to change, and press . Phone settings General Phone language âÂÂChanging the language of th e display texts in your phone also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automat ic selects the language according to the information on your SI M card. After you change the display text language, the phone restarts. Changing the settings for Phone language or Writin g language affects every application in your phone, and the change remains effective until you change these settings again. Writing language âÂÂChanging the language affects the characters an d special characters available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Dictionary âÂÂYou can set the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the phone. Th e predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. Welcome note or logo âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time y ou switch on the phone. Select Off to disable the Welcome note or logo , Text to write a welcome note (up to 50 letters), or Image to select a photo or picture from Gallery . Orig. phon e settin gs âÂÂYou can res et some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. See âÂÂSecurityâÂÂ, âÂÂPhone and SIMâÂÂ, p. 92. After resetting, the phone may take a longer time to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Standby mode Active standby âÂÂUse shortcuts to applicatio ns in the standby mode. See âÂÂActive standby modeâÂÂ, p. 15 Left selection k ey âÂÂTo assign a shortc ut to the left selection key ( ) in the standby mode, select an application from the list.
Tools 87 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Right selection key âÂÂTo assign a shortc ut to the right selection key ( ) in the standby mode, select an application from the list. You can also as sign keypad shortcu ts for the different presses of the scroll key, by selecting an application from the list. The scroll key shortc uts are not available if the active standby is o n. Operator logo âÂÂThis setting is visib le only if you have received and saved an operator logo. You can c hoose if you want the operator logo to show or not. Display Brightness âÂÂYou c an change the brightness of the display to lighter or darker. The brighness of the display is automatically adjusted according to the environment. Screen saver timeout âÂÂThe screen saver is activa ted when the timeout period is over. Light time-out âÂÂSelect a timeout after which the backlight is switched off. Call settings Send my caller ID (network service)â You ca n set you r phone number to be displaye d to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your network operator or service provider when you make a subscription ( Set by network ). Call waiting (network service)âÂÂIf you ha ve activated call waiting, the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a ca ll in progress. Select Activat e to request the network to ac tivate call waiting, Cancel to request the network to deac tivate call waiting, or Check status to check if the func tion is active or not. Reject call with SMS âÂÂSelect Yes to s end a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the call. See âÂÂAnswer or reject a callâÂÂ, p. 22. Message te xt âÂÂWrite a te xt to be sent in a text message when you reject a call. Tip! To change the settings for call divert ing, press , and select Tools > Settings > Call divert . See âÂÂCall divertingâÂÂ, p. 94. Automatic redi al âÂÂSelect On , and your phone makes a maximum of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To st op automatic redialling pres s .
Tools 88 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Summary after call âÂÂActivate this sett ing if you want the phone to briefly display the approximate duration of the last call. Speed dialling âÂÂSelect On , and the numbers assigned to the speed dialling keys ( - ) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See also âÂÂSpeed dial a phone numberâÂÂ, p. 21. Anykey ans wer âÂÂSelect On , and you ca n answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any key, except , , , and . Line in us e (network servic e)âÂÂThis sett ing is shown only if the SIM card supports two su bscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending t ext messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespecti ve of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Tip! To switch between the phone lines, press and hold in the standby mode. Line change (network service)âÂÂTo prevent line selection, select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Connection settings Data connections and access points Your phone supports packet data connections ( ), such as GPRS in the GSM network. Glossary: General packet radio service (GPRS) uses packet data technology wher e information is sent in short packets of data ov er the mobile network. To establish a data connection, an ac cess point is required. You can define diffe rent kinds of access points, such as: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Access point fo r the Web applicati on to view WML or XHTML page s ⢠Internet ac cess point ( IAP) to send and receive e-mail Check the kind of access poin t you need with your service provider for the service you wi sh to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your network operator or service provider. Packet data connections in GSM netwo rks When you use your phone in GSM networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time, access points can share a data connection, and dat a connections remain
Tools 89 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. active during voice ca lls. To check the active data connections, see âÂÂConnection managerâÂÂ, p. 82. The following indicators may be d isplayed below the signal indicator, dependin g on which network you use: GSM network, packet data is available in the network. GSM network, packet data co nnection is ac tive, data is being transferred. GSM network, multiple packet data connections are active. GSM network, packet data co nnection is on hold. (This can happen during a voice call, for example.) Receive access point settings You may receive access point settings in a text message from a service provider, or you may hav e preset access point settings in your phone. See âÂÂData and settingsâÂÂ, p. 48. To create a ne w access point, select Tools > Settings > Connec tion > Access points . An access point may be protected ( ) by your netwo rk operator or service provider. Protected access points cannot be edited or deleted. Access points Options in the Access points list are Edit , New access point , Delete , Help , and Exit . Follow the instructions given to you by your service provi der . Connection name âÂÂGive a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer âÂÂDepending on what data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in al l fields marked with Must be de fined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider. Options when editing access point settings are Change , Advanced settings , Help , and Exit . To be able to use a data co nnection, the network service provider must sup port this feature, and if necessary , activate it for your SIM card. Access point name (for packet data only)âÂÂThe access point name is needed to establ ish a connection to the packet data network. You obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider. Tip! See also âÂÂReceive MMS and e-mail settingsâÂÂ, p. 47, âÂÂE-mailâÂÂ, p. 54, and âÂÂAccess the WebâÂÂ, p. 60. User name âÂÂThe user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the se rvice provider. The user name is often case-sensitive.
Tools 90 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter a new password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the phone, choose Yes . Password âÂÂA password may be needed to make a da ta connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. The password is often ca se-sensit ive. Authentication âÂÂSelect Normal or Secure . Homepage âÂÂDepending on what you are setting up, write the Web address or the a ddress of the multimedia messaging centre. Select Options > Advanced sett ings to change the following setting s: Network type âÂÂSelect the Internet protocol type to use: IPv4 settings or IPv6 setting s . Phone IP address âÂÂEnter the IP address of your phone. Name servers âÂÂIn Primary nam e server: , enter the IP address of the prim ary DNS server. In Second. name server: , enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your Internet serv ice provider to ob tain these addresses. Glossary: The domain name service (DNS) is an Internet service that transl ates domain names such as www.nokia.com into IP addres ses like 192.100.124.195. Proxy serv. addr ess âÂÂDefine the address for the proxy server. Proxy por t number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data conn. âÂÂIf you select When av ailable and you are in a network that suppor ts packet data, the phone registers to the packet data network. Also, starting an active packet data connection is quicker (for example, to send and receive e-mail). If you select When need ed , the phone uses a packet data connec tion only if you start an application or action that needs it. If there is no packet data coverage and you select When available , the phone periodically tries to es tablis h a packet data connection. Access point âÂÂThe access point name is needed to use your phone as a packet data modem to your computer. Configurations You may receive trusted server settings fro m your network operator or service provider in a configurat ion message, or the settings may be stored on your SIM or USIM card. Yo u can save these settings to your phone, view, or delete them in Configurations .
Tools 91 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Date and time See âÂÂClock settingsâÂÂ, p. 16. See also the language settings in âÂÂGeneralâÂÂ, p. 86. Security Phone and SIM PIN code reque st âÂÂWhen active, the code is requested each time the phone is switched on. Deactivating the personal identification number (PIN) code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. S ee âÂÂGlossary of PIN and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 92. PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock c ode âÂÂYou can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9 . See âÂÂGlossary of PIN and lock codesâÂÂ, p. 92. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. Autolock peri od âÂÂYou can set an autolock period, a time- out after which the phone auto matically lock s and can be used only if the correct lo ck code is entered. Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select None to turn off the autolock period. To unlock the phone, enter the lock code. Note: When the phone is locked, calls in offline profile to certain emer gency numbers programmed into your phone are still possible. Tip! To lock the phone manu ally, press . A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone . Lock if SIM changed âÂÂYou can set the phone to ask for the lock code when an unknow n SIM card is inserted into your phone. The phone mainta ins a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Fixed dialli ng âÂÂYou can restri ct calls and text messages from your phone to selected phone numbers, if supported by your SIM card. You need the PIN2 code for this function. To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, press , and select Tools > Settings > Securi ty > Phone and SIM > Fixed dialling . To add new numbers to the fixe d dialling list, select Options > New contact or Add from Contacts . When you use Fixed dialli ng , packet data connections are not possible, except when se nding text messages over a packet data connection. In this case, the
Tools 92 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. message centre number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialling list. Options in the Fixe d dialling view are Open , Call, Activ. fixed dialling / Deact. fixed dialling , New contact , Edit , Delete , Add to Contacts , Add f rom C onta cts , Find , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . Note: When security fea tures that restrict calls are in use (such as Call barring , Closed user group , and Fixed dialling ) calls still may be poss ible to the official emergency numbers progra mmed into your phone. Closed user group (network service)âÂÂYou can specif y a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you. Confirm SI M services (network se rvice) âÂÂYou can set the phone to display confirmati on messag es when you are using a SIM card service. Glossary of PIN and lock codes Personal identific ation number (PIN) codeâÂÂThis co de protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supp lied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrec t PIN code entries, the PIN code is blocked, and you need to unblock it before y ou can use the SIM card again. See the infor mation about the PUK code in this section. UPIN codeâÂÂThis code may b e supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. The UPIN code protects the USIM card against unauthor ised use. PIN2 codeâÂÂThis code (4 t o 8 digits) is suppli ed with some SIM cards, and is required to access some f unctions in y our phone. Lock codeâÂÂThis code (5 digits) can be used to lock the phone to avoid unauthorised us e. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorised use of your phone, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your phone. Personal unblocking key (PUK) code and PUK2 codeâÂÂThese codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact t he operator whose SIM card is in your phone. UPUK codeâÂÂThis code (8 digits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the operat or whose USIM card is in your phone. Wallet codeâÂÂThis code is required to use the wallet services. See âÂÂWalletâÂÂ, p. 69.
Tools 93 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Certificate management Digital certificates do not guar antee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certifica te management main view, you can see a list of authority ce rtificates th at are stored i n your phone. Press to see a list of personal cert ificates, if available. Options in the certificat e management main view are Certificate d etails , Delete, Trust se ttings, Mark/Unmark , Help , an d Exit . Glossary: Digital certificates ar e used to verify th e origin of the XHTML or WML pages and i nstalled software. However, they can only be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferring co nfidential information. They should also be used if yo u want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious so ftware and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing software. Important: Even if th e use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably s maller, they must be used correctly in order to benef it from increas ed security. The existence of a certificate do es not offer any protection by itself; the certificate mana ger must contain correct, authentic, or trusted c ertificates for increas ed security to be available. Certificates ha ve a restr icted lifetime. If Expired certifi cate or Certificate n ot valid yet is shown even if the certificate shou ld be valid, check that the current date and time in your phone are correct. View certific ate details âÂÂcheck auth enticit y You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the pe riod of validity of a server certificate have be en checked. You are notified on the phone display if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your phone. To check certificate details, scro ll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate detai ls . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certifi cate is checked, and one of the following notes may be display ed: ⢠Certificate not trusted âÂÂY ou have not set any applica tion to use the cert if icate. See âÂÂChange the trust settingsâÂÂ, p. 94 . ⢠Expired certific ate âÂÂThe period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid yet âÂÂThe period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer.
Tools 94 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Change the t rust settin gs Before changing any certificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust th e owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the lis ted owner. Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Options > Trust setting s . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: ⢠Symbian installation : Yes âÂÂThe cert ificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify servers. ⢠App. installation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java application. Select Options > Edit trust setting to change the value. Call diverting Call divert allows you to divert your incoming calls to your voice mailbox or anothe r phone number. For details, contact your service provid er. 1 Press , and selec t Tools > Settings > Call divert . 2 Select the desired divert option. To divert voice calls when your numbe r is busy or when you reject inncoming calls, select If busy . 3 Set the divert option on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is activated ( Check status ). Several divert opt ions can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. Call barring (network service) Call barring allows you to restrict the calls that you make or receive with the phone. To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whethe r the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Call barring and Call divert cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls still may be possible to certain official emer gency numbers.
Tools 95 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Network Operator selecti on âÂÂSelect Automatic to set the phone to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list of networks . If the conn ection to the manually selected network is lost, the phone soun ds a n error tone and asks you to reselect a network. Th e selected network must have a roaming agreeme nt with your home network, that is, the operator whose SIM card is in your phone. Glossary: A r oaming agreement is an agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Cell info displ ay âÂÂSelect On to set the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellular network ba sed on microc ellul ar network (MCN) technolog y and to activate cell info reception . Enhancement settings Indicators shown in the standby mode: A headset, music stand, or Bluetooth wireless technology device is connected. A loopset is connected. A car ki t is con nected. The headset is unavailable, or a Bluetooth connection to a headset is lost. Sele ct Headset , Carkit , Bluetooth handsfree , or Loopset and the following options are available: Default profile âÂÂTo set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain enhancement to your phone. See âÂÂSet tonesâÂÂ, p. 12. Automatic ans wer âÂÂTo set the phone to answer an incoming call automatically afte r 5 seco nds. If the Ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer is disab led . Voice commands You can use voice commands to control your phon e. You record voice commands in the same way as voice tags. See âÂÂAdd a voice tagâÂÂ, p. 28. Press , and select Tools > Voice com. Add a voice command to an application You can have only one voice command per application.
Tools 96 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 1 Select the application to which you want to add a voice command. To add a new application to the list, select Option s > New application . 2 Select Options > Add voice command . See âÂÂAdd a voice tagâÂÂ, p. 28. Application manager Press , and select Tool s > Manager . You can install two types of applications and software to your phone: ⢠J2ME⢠applications based on Java⢠technology with the extension JAD or JAR ( ). Do not d ownload PersonalJava⢠applications to your phone, as they cannot be insta lled. Example: If you have received the installation file as an e-mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e-mail, open the attachments view, scro ll to the installation file, and press to start installation. ⢠Other applications and so ftware suitable for the Symbian operating system ( ). The installation files have the SIS extension. Only install software specifically desig ned for your Nokia 6681 device. Install ation file s may be tr an sferred to your phone from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using a Bluetooth connection. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia PC Suite to install an application to your phone or a memory card. I f you use Microsoft Windows Explorer to tr ansfer a file, save the file to a memory card (local disk). Install applications and software Application icons are as follows: SIS application Java application Application is not fully installed. Application is installed on the memory card. Import ant: Only install applications from so urces that offer adequate protection against harmful software. Before installation, do the following: To view the applicatio n type, version number, and t he supplier or manufacturer of the application, selec t Options > View detail s . To display the security certificate details of the application, select Options > View certificate . See âÂÂCertificate managementâÂÂ, p. 93.
Tools 97 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. If y ou in st al l a f il e th at co nt ai ns an u pd at e o r re pa ir to an existing application, you can only rest ore the original application if you have the origin al installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the appl ication, and install the application again from the or iginal installation file or the backup copy. Tip! You can also use Nokia Application Installer available in Nokia PC Suite to install applications. See the CD-ROM supplied with the phone. The JAR file is required for inst alling Java applications. If it is missing, the phone may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the JAR file, you may ne ed to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. 1 Open Manager , and scroll to an installation file. Alternatively, search the phone memory or the memory card, select the application, and press to start the installation. 2 Select Options > Install . Tip! While browsing, yo u can download an installation file and inst all it without cl osing the connectio n. During instal lation, the phone shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application without a digital signature or certification, the phone displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of the origin and contents of the application. Options in the Manager main view are Install , App. downloads , Vi ew details , Go to web ad dress , View certificate , Se nd , Remove , View log , Send log , Update , Settings , Help , and Exit . To start an installed applicatio n, scrol l to it, and press . To start a network connection and to view extra information about the application, scroll to it, and select Options > Go to web address , if available. To see what software packag es have been installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . To send your installation log to a help desk so that they can see what has been installed or removed, select Options > Send log > Via te xt message , Via m ultim edia , Via Bluetooth , or Via e-mail (available only if the correct e-mail settings are in place). Remove applications and software Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Remove . Pres s Yes to confirm. If you remove softwa re, you ca n only reinstall it if you have the original software package or a full backup of the
Tools 98 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. removed soft ware pack age. If you remove a sof tware package, you may no longer be able to open doc uments created with that software. Note: If another software packag e depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may st op working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Application settings Software installation âÂÂSelect the kind of software you want installed: On , Si gned only , or Off . Online ce rtif. check âÂÂSelect to check the online certificates before installing an application. Default web address âÂÂSet the default ad dress used when checking online certifica tes. Some Java applications ma y require a phone call, a message to be sent, or a n etwork connection to a specific access point for downloading extra data or components. In the Manager main view, scroll to an application, and select Options > Suite sett ings to change setti ngs related to that specific application. Activation keysâÂÂhandle copyright-protected files Copyright protections may prevent some images, ringing tones, and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Press , and select Tools > Activation keys to v iew the digital rights activation keys stored in your phone. ⢠Valid keys ( ) are connected to one or more media files. ⢠With expired keys ( ), you have no time to use the media file, or the time period for using the file is exceeded. To view the Expired acti vation keys, press . ⢠To buy more usage time or extend the usage period for a media file, select an ac tivation key, and Options > Activate con tent . Activation keys cannot be updated if Web service message receptio n is disabled. See âÂÂWeb service messagesâÂÂ, p. 56. ⢠To view which keys are not in use at the moment ( Not used ), press twice. Unused activation keys have no media files connected to them saved in the phone. ⢠To view detailed information such a s the validity status and ability to se nd the file, select an activation key, and press .
Troubleshooting 99 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Troubleshooting Q&A Bluetooth connectivity Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device? A: Check that both devices have activated Bluetoot h connectivity. Check that the distance betw een the two devices is not over 10 metres and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Check that the other device is not in hidden mode. Check that both devices are compatible. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If another device is connected to your phone , you can either end the connection using the ot her device or by deactivating Bluetooth connectivity. Select Connect. > Bluetooth > Off . Multimedia messaging Q: What should I do when th e phone cannot receive a multimedia message be cause memory is full? A: The amount of memory needed is indicated in the error message: Not enough memory to retrieve message. Del ete some data first. To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the differe nt data groups consume, select Tools > File manager > Options > Memory details . Q: The note Ret rieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The phone is trying to retrieve a multimedi a message from the multimedia messaging ce ntre. Check that the settings for multimedia mes saging are defined correctly and that ther e are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses . Select Mess aging > Options > Settings > Multimed ia message . Q: How can I end the data conne ction when the phone starts a data connection again and again ? A: To stop the phone from making a data connection, select Messaging and one of the following : On receiving msg. > Defer retr ieval âÂÂTo have the multimedia messaging centre save the message to be retrieved later, for example, after you have checked the settings . After this change , th e phone still needs to send information note s to the network. To retri eve the messa ge now, select Retr. immediately . On receiving msg . > Reject message âÂÂTo reject all incoming multimedia messages. A fter th is change, the phone needs to send information not es to the network, and the multimedia messaging cent re deletes multi media messages that are waiting to be sent to you. Multimedia r eception > Off âÂÂTo ignore all incoming multimedia messages. After th is change, the phone does
Troubleshooting 100 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. not make any network connections relat ed to multimedia messaging. Messaging Q: Why canâ t I select a conta ct? A: The contact card does not have a phone number or an e-mail address. Add the missing information to the contact card in Contacts . Camera Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Check to see if the came ra len s protection window is clean. Calendar Q: Why are the week numbers missing? A: If you have changed the ca lend ar settings so that the week starts on a day other than Monday, the week numbers will not be shown. Browser services Q: What do I do if the following message is displayed: No valid access point define d. Define one in W eb settings. ? A: Insert the correct brow ser se ttings. Contact yo ur service provider for instructions. Log Q: Why does the log appear empty? A: You may have activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filt er ha ve been logged. To see all events, select Connect. > Log > Opt ions > Filter > All commun icati on . Q: How do I delete my log information? A: Select Connect. > Log > Opti ons > Clear log or go to Setti ngs > Log duratio n > No log . These will erase the log contents, recent calls register, and message delivery reports permanently. PC connectivity Q: Why do I have problems in conn ecting the phone to my PC? A: Make sure that Nokia PC Suit e is installed and running on your PC. See the Us er Guide for Nokia PC Suite on the CD-ROM. For further information on how to use Nokia PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia PC Suite or visit the support pages at www.nokia.com . Acce ss codes Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your phone dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, cont act your network service prov ider. For information about passwo rds, contact your access point provider, for examp le, a commercial Inte rnet service provider (ISP), service provider, or network operator. Application not responding Q: How do I close an application that is not responding?
Troubleshooting 101 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. A: Open the application swit ch ing window b y pressing and holding . Then scroll to the app lication, and press to close the application. Phone display Q: Why do missing , discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I turn on my phone? A: This is a characte ristic of this type of dis play. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Memory low Q: What can I do if my phon e memory is low? A: You can delet e the following ite ms regularly to avoid memory getting low: Messages from Inbox , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messaging Retrieved e-mail messages from the phone memory Saved browser pages Images and photos in Gal lery To delete contact information, calendar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, or any other data, go to the respective applicat ion to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and one of the follow ing notes are shown : Not enough memory to pe rform operation. Delet e some data first. or Memory low. Delete some data. , try deleting items one by one (sta rting from the smallest item). Q: How can I save my data before deleting it? A: Save your data using one of the followi ng methods: Use Nokia PC Suite to make a back up copy of all data to a compatible computer. Send images to your e-mail address, and then save the images to your computer. Send data using a Bluetooth connection to a compatible device. Store data on a compatible memory card.
Battery information 102 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is pow ered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new batt ery is achieved only after tw o or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeabl y shorter than no rmal , buy a new battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and re charge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Unplug the charger from the elec trical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave the battery connected to a charger. Overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unuse d, a fully charged battery will lo se its charge over t ime. Temperature extremes can affect the ability of your battery to charge. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental sh ort-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the batte ry. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditio ns, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may no t work te mporarily, even w hen the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is partic ularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire! Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possib le. Do not dispose as household waste.
Care and maintenance 103 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treate d with ca re. The sugges tions below will help you protect your warra nty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity and all types of liquids or moist ure can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the batte ry and allow t he device to dry completel y before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving p arts an d electr onic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of ele ctronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in co ld areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and dama ge electronic ci rcuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt t o open the device other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shak e the device . Rough handling can break in ternal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergent s to clean the device. ⢠Do not paint the device . Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper ope ration. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses (such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses). ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorised ante nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. All of the above suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhanc ement. If any device is not working properly, take i t to the nearest authorized service facility for service.
Additional safety information 104 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Additional safety information Operating environment Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may ca use interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. To maintain compliance with radio frequency exposure guidelines only use enhancements approved by Noki a for use with this device. When the device is on and be ing worn o n the body, always use an approved hold er or carrying case . Medical devices Operation of any radio t ransmitting equipment, includi ng wireless phones, may inte rfere with the functionality of inadequately protect ed medical devices. Consult a physician or the manu facturer of the me dical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any reg ulations poste d in these areas instruct you to do so. Ho spitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensi tive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 6 in. (15.3 cm ) be maint ained between a wireless phone and a pacema ker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. T hese recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should: ⢠always keep the device more than 6 in. (15.3 cm) from t heir pacema ker when th e devi ce is switched on; ⢠not carry the device in a breast pocket; and ⢠hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimise the potential for interference. If you have any reason to susp ect that interference is taking place, switch off your device immediately. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere wit h some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded elect ronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (ant ilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added.
Additional safety information 105 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or servi ce may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartmen t as the device , its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equippe d with an air bag, remember t hat air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless eq uipme nt in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deploy ment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly insta lled and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in ai rcraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, di srupt the wi reless telephone netw ork, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environm ents Switch off your device when in any ar ea with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where yo u would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engin e. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire result ing in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points s uch as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include b elow deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or part icles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate usi ng radio signals, w ireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essent ial communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the device is not on, swit ch it on. Chec k for adequate signal stren gth. Some networks may require that a valid SIM or USIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3 Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4 Press the key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information.
Additional safety information 106 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of commu nication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. WARNING! In offline profile you cannot make calls, except calls to certain emergency num bers, or use features that require network coverage. Certification information (SAR) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio tr ansmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIR P). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general popula tion. The guidelines were developed by independ ent scie ntific organisations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scient ific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all person s, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices e mploys a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit state d in the international guidel ines is 2.0 W/kg*. Tests for SAR are conducte d using standard operating positions with t he device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all test ed frequency bands. Although the SAR is de termined at the hi ghest certified power level, the actual SAR of the d evice while operating can be well belo w the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. The highest SAR value fo r this device when tes ted for use at the ear is 0.79 W/kg. This device meets RF exposure gu idelines when use d either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for bo dy-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should pos itio n the product at least 1.5 cm away from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, t his device requires a quality connection to the network. In s ome cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmis sion is completed. * The SAR limit for mobile devices used by the public is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over ten grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorpor ate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www.nokia.com .
Index 107 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Index A access points 88 settings 89 activation keys 98 alarms alarm clock 16 calendar alarms 58 applications, Java 96 B Bluetooth connecting two device s, pairing 80 connection requests 80 connection status indicators 81 device address 80 device icons 80 factory set passcode 80 headset 95 pairing requests 80 pairing, glossary explanation 80 passcode, glossary explanation 80 switching off 82 bookmark, glossary explanation 61 brightness display 87 setting in camera 31 , 34 C cache clearing 64 calendar alarm 58 stopping a calendar alarm 58 synchronising PC Suite 59 call register See log calls dialled numbers 23 duration 23 international 21 received 23 settings 87 settings for call divert 94 transferring 22 camera 30 adjusting brightness 31 , 34 adjusting contrast 31 , 34 night mode 31 saving video clips 34 self-timer 32 send ing im ages 31 sequence mode 32 video recorder settings 34 CD-ROM 82 certificates 93 chat See instant messaging clear screen See standby mode Clearing memory Log information 100 clock alarm 16 settings 16 snooze 16 codes 91 lock code PIN code 92 PIN2 code 92 computer connections 82 conference call 21 connection settings 88 contact cards inserting pictures 26 storing DTMF tones 23 contrast setting in camera 31 , 34 copying contacts b etween the SI M card and device memory 27
Index 108 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. text 45 copyright protection see activation keys cutting text 45 D data connections details 83 ending 83 date settings 91 digital rights management, DRM see activation keys DNS, domain name service, glossary explanation 90 E editing videos 37 adding effects 37 adding sound clips 37 adding transitions 37 custom video clips 37 e-mail 46 offline 52 opening 50 remote mailbox 49 retrieving from mailbox 50 settings 54 viewing attachments 51 F file formats JAD file 96 JAR file 96 , 97 RealPlayer 39 SIS file 96 file manager 17 fixed dialling 91 G gallery 35 H handsfree see loudspeaker headset s ettings 95 I instant messag ing 73 blocking 76 connecting to a server 73 groups 77 individ ual conver sations 75 recording the messages 75 sending a private message 74 sending instan t messages 74 user ID, glossary expl anation 75 Internet access points (IAP) See access points IP address, glossary explanation 90 J Java See applications, Java L list 89 lock cod e 92 log erasing contents 25 filtering 25 log duration 25 loopset settings 95 loudspeaker 17 activating 17 turning off 17 M mailbox 49 media files fast forward 40 file formats 39 mute s ound 40 rewind 40 memory clearing memory 23 , 24 viewing memory consumption 18 memory card 19 menu rearranging 12
Index 109 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. messaging e-mail 46 multimedia message 46 text message 46 multimedia messages 46 mute sound 40 my home city 17 P packet data connections 82 GPRS, glossary explanation 88 settings 90 pasting text 45 PC connections via Bluetooth or USB cable 82 PC Suite calendar data 59 synchronisation 82 transferring images to a PC 35 transferring music files to your memory card 35 viewing phone memory data 18 personalisation 14 PIN code 92 R recording video 34 recording voice tags 28 , 95 reminder See calendar, alarm remote mailbox 49 resolution, glossary exp lanation 33 ringing tones adding a personal ringing tone 27 receiving in a text message 49 removing a personal ringing tone 27 S security code See lock code sending contact cards, business cards 27 images 31 video clips 38 service commands 43 settings access codes 91 access points 89 Bluetooth connection 79 calendar 59 call barring 94 call diverting 94 certificates 93 data connections 88 date and time 91 display 87 headset 95 IM setting s 73 , 78 language 86 lock code 92 loopset 95 original settings 86 personalising the phone 12 PIN code 92 screen saver 87 UPIN code 92 UPUK code 92 wallet 71 wallet code 92 shortcuts camera 31 web connection 60 SIM card copying names and numbers to phone 27 messages 52 names and numbers 27 SIS file 96 SMS centre, short mes sage service centre 53 snooze alarm clock 16 calendar alarm 58 software transferring a file to your device 96
Index 110 Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reser ved. sound clips 35 sounds muting a ringi ng tone 22 recording sounds 68 speed dialling 21 standby mode 12 synchronisation 83 T text message 46 text message service centre adding new 53 thumbnail images in a contact card 26 time settings 91 transferring content from another phone 13 U UPIN code 92 UPUK code 92 USB cable 82 USSD commands 43 V video clips 35 video player See RealPlayer video recorder See camera voice dialling 28 , 95 voice mailbox 21 changing the phone number 21 diverting calls to voice mailbox 94 voice messages 21 voice tags 28 , 95 adding 28 , 95 making calls 28 volume co ntrol 17 during a call 21 loudspeaker 17 W wallet 69 entering the wallet code 70 resetting wallet code 72 settings 71 storing card details 70 viewing ticket details 71 wallet code 70 , 92 web access points, see access p oints access points, see access points
9237084_LA_1.fh10 27.1.2005 21:21 Page 2